Home

ZyXEL XGS-4528F User's Manual

1. oa 230 THOS OSPF ve RI istesrticis vp iaa VEL eS a t TERR ai UT i b V v Ri d 231 Table 30 OSPF RON TYPOS RN T m o m m anes 231 Tabe S7 IP Applicaton gt OSPF SIAME qe 234 Table 88 OSPF Status Common Output Fields sisccncensvarnatinssseutenaincnendss ihassaveuavakindonulisiaenniareerontonsine 234 Table 89 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings 236 Table 90 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup cccscceceeeeeeeeeeeeecenceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 237 Table 91 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Summary Table sss 238 Table 92 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface essssssssssess 239 Table 93 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Virtual Link esses 241 Table 94 IP Application gt IGMP 1 usenseker iere aab EE ERMEERR ERE EE ENE N R 246 Table SS IP Application DVNIBP amp ccienssendbeber ens beet eua vader a hdd eer d aba d uda be pue bv bri a FER dirt Geb PEN EFa dE 249 Table 96 DVMRP Default Timer Valles ieeuic een rae eene Ln nna te mk canada nk eh ik ha R o paa eR REA AA 250 Table 97 IP Application gt DMSO 1ursssmpe peti a I PERPE S TRE e TREE ate edad is Petra pv GEI eased 254 Table 98 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker
2. 131 TAT Port INCRE GEB uiiiosdererexxX E Hee TER eta N Gr pesi apte Sd Root 131 Chapter 15 Link Aggregato TIT EO sce 133 T2 T LK Agregaltobi OOW ccc bane ep uH dette eer er tree rr dl X EE EH Lor ntu Mea PU QURE rete 133 152 Dynamie LOk cc CE T 133 JEMEN E c r qi RNC T T 134 15 3 IB Soeur qe 134 154 Link Aggregation UNS uuisiscdkdsedda oU cote tlc no saat Fe do p c UD GO HR aiae 135 15 5 LinkAggregation Control Protocol isaspotedcm epis ne CHRHODAR E FFEOP REEKRERI KENN HE dea HERR Pr een ME E RMUG 136 js enim psu 138 Chapter 16 Par AUthenicatloito iva RR EARCI SR ERA REM LER REVUE In AANA ENa TANAAN RR AC MEET ER 0S KREVE FQ EUR TRES RK EE 141 16 1 Port Authentication Overview ius exces terere ERXL RB sad eda pua a Cle exta adi pax xA LER vaa Rd 141 1611 IEEE 302 1xX T c i TT 141 XGS 4528F User s Guide Table of Contents TE 122 tercius M e 142 16 2 POM Authentication ConhouratiOm T o E ia inan 143 16 271 Activate IEEE 8021x Se0urity ics d ed Aot PE Eu E cides Aniani anini 143 1522 Activa MAC Pune URED Loa eerte a Md vendo bod a cnp adita 144 Chapter 17 FO SOQUMD d ipsa esas be litt ai cH eid in RR a rab Rd Dope Pe paa Sx cU ME ba Mf Mi REM IE RAE HU Pe MM inf 147 TE PAID POL OT usse dre mE tap PR dr Cen erit En E
3. M 183 22 5 MYR Configuraton EXSn BIG clases aster utc ARES DU e ug Red viene 184 Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Lieu ieeue i reses bue ta puu na Xpo bas bat ba Ire Vk E Fan kEREPRERREIRK ENDE EVERERVERREVEEEUPNRKR 187 23 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting sssssssssseeeeneee 187 Wal al Ee c gae e a A a EE 187 23 LZ RADIUS and TARR CW i rccte phi a aaia ERR LEER Mx EA a Nan ead PN Ka A dua ony 188 43 2 Authentication and Accounting SOIGGnig iisseecs eee ttp epran etes asa acbba sanae cnt sane kerna 188 222 RADIUS Server SO aisssutesipaaeteie ie a MIHI EE ERR EE WE ed 188 23 2 2 IACAGCS SENET SAUD uuiscuieditsepiaicssta esoc ixi i bem UE ME MM EE 190 23 2 3 Authentication and Accounting Setup ssseseeee en 192 23 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute aiid seen sac e eati e rh a naati aai oaa E Np x sail EN Aa eli paa p aad 195 23 2 5 Tunnel Protocol NIU IDUS 6 cscs cccacnerndevens naa PRI EERAE SE d SIR EE OP ERR ERU AGIS PREMIERE PUES 196 23 3 Supported RADIUS ABCIDUDEBS 125 55 Lotte rp LII pH n PICO EE EREEEERHEI det IS tod es LER ERE FE HEAR TRAE 196 23 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication iui essere rti iniinda LEER ata ka duende 197 25 3 2 Attributes Used for ACCOUNT iius adc btt cube rdi nainii 197 Chapter 24 IF Source Guard 201 24 IP Source Guard OYEC RET m T 201 PAA DAP Snooping OYEN Rete ETT 201 24 1 2 ARF Insp
4. 164 Chapter 21 VLAN SUSY uccisi E A E T MORE AREE KIA OUCFERATER EIAS UDAMEPEVIU T 167 11 VLAN Stacking VOI istas rie vu pese tristes tr bo pev abe c aeu end beu R 167 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example cccctctcsctuirecussdscadsccavs tumet aeina n S E 167 CARRIE D Slacking Font ROES Rm m T 168 2129 WEAN IO EO ouais errr terete trate D tren MCI RN GR NOE MI uM ENDE 169 12 PEIUS DIVI 42222 cas path arta aot o ete e D RE i Eb M aai pou t od EU E 169 21 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking ceca hid ga ad ENARRARE Rd ERR NA RR NERA BARN RM BRA RM Ua Lp 170 XGS 4528F User s Guide 15 Table of Contents Chapter 22 POURED ASE A T dsanisanvandaduavesvedidvandsatasanineisbuslad A T TE OI T E E TT 173 Fe MURGAS Ee IPIS Zee t Km TS 173 EM IP Multicast PORES SOS m 173 zd Aare UT AMM NY 25 sa stade ceca eNO ta ER bk EX a ERE ech awed RA S K ERA EAE tenes 173 Esa ET erga cc 173 22 135 IOMP Snooping and VLAMS ecuria sr D err i d querido d ada did as 174 FACRIS IDE RII MNT NE TR E o TT 174 22 3 MUNIGASE SENM P 174 Z2 IMP SIRO VEAN sesira vestes Rt BORA CHEER CLE FHUR UL REVUE CE UR ED URS 177 22 0 OMF FONO FOIE aee 178 226 MYR OVEMNIEW E M 179 246 1 Types ot MYR PONG TRUE SUE mt 180 220 2 WAV ee o reU 180 22 5 3 How MYR WOKS ss cessinsaccestinsasecessinindssarlnanteasiy nuscessnssnsannivaasseainaae GR 180 xata pergis T 181 22 6 MYR Group CONRGUIIION m
5. The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 155 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NosrE S OWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 XGS 4528F User s Guide 351 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 155 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this i
6. 23 Last of T3bles cod E E PUE N AEAEE OO ab RU DNO Gone eU GU RU xa EE va S CRURA N VR ERR ENAT 29 Part l Introduction eR T 33 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your SWIDoliueseniecie neun akon nana RR2KRuR RE XREX ERR uRSNKOR SKAV apa Ao RAN RoRRuKAKRANKRKRAKR Asa ANA 35 1 1 WARN uu ier tt ices oo ei ote E e LE uet baec ioa poet t ad UL Code aec o S aet i Rudd 35 jus sr mee E 35 1 1 2 High Pertonmnance Switching Exsmplg iiia rh rrt Rr S irsana 36 1 1 3 Gigabit Ethemet to the Desktop ius d east ua kodunu tta a uia Sta ku eni Eom kon gira qna ctr ka Ria hp a 37 1 14 EEE 802 10 VLAN Application Example i riore aa ttr rrt td prar cH uk ad Ee cauda 37 12 Ways to Manage 8 SWE o es ete seks sl ea d ea Eas bri ente adt bi ion aaa 38 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Sw reo trot ap erba T MERE ra eHASEE RH FLIYURE RED RE EEEN an 38 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 1 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nnn nna nnn ranas 39 2 1 Figesianding Noea M 39 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1i sasntdeals or trien dddua opa a I ENEA REA EANN E ENAS e ERR 40 2 2 1 Ra k mo nted Installation Re uirementS sescissceccsesconticcersetuecestcaannecensscerecetenccaueeeneces 40 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch sess 40 2 2 9 Mo nt ng the Switch ena Rak aui scopre IR pbepE SEE PERS ei EEN 41 Chapter 3 Hardware VPE i iode Lt LU ES FE DEP LR N OL LEE RE FUERO TREE entities 43 S
7. 281 ea FORT IANS c H 281 24 0 Restore a Coniigurallon Flle ciinumnneaiieianineenenaineaeinnsmeneaes 282 4 7 Backup a Configuration File aauosecccttosnekchtisesesueutitese ssrin tial pb ebbLboe d Fea HI a FL LId Abre 282 dec FIP GSP LIS zii doosiiux eese a bii n iq rue pM Ad ca EM ER dey 283 24 8 1 Flleitame Convenio i e se pec HR FOE E FH a PER SERE REPERUE EHE ARE po V eA PEEE MEER S MOERS ERN 283 2548 2 FTP Command Line PEOCOIMIE 1 cicius sevee ES top LAE PAR GR ennn da HI EIER SA ra 283 34 8 3 GUl bpased FTP Clients e R 284 SADAF HM ule eR 284 Chapter 35 Fs o4 Control e M 285 ug T Access DORFOLOQVEPVIBWE aussncicctedden ebode trei a eia EULE M Fac EEEa aA bcr x S PER UL Eti 285 39 2 The Access Contool Mall eee si eae Roe EFFI DH SEERU E CHM NRR 285 cud APO ONDI sisson eiie i orb RE ERR LR ER a b ln n OR RC Cn E UR 286 201 SNMP v3 and SOOHBIBY ait etate epu e Ppa al Soden el ax ag ga cp pa dad ga 287 Soe MDOOMCR I 287 Cm eme dc M L 287 2024 COMM GNI serinin Qa pue DE Ite TIAM EUR EH MER LIN REEE RUE 290 35 3 5 Conmguring SNMP Trap GFODD aiscseescseciisicisescoces seas abut eire Yo ab td a Exe ttd der vanes 292 29 2 6 Seling Up Login ACCOUN S inaoeuxieti tn Een ta e Rod rd epa a Ka E tain d 293 a DS EUSIVIbN ciususuielece e Data uieidad titanic banana aun Ua iudei late
8. sssssssusss 328 24 3 Problems with tie PaSSWONNT 1o ocsiussck eese cesa eo PyL PUE E Furia abd eL ERO LEN EE eiid ein anioia 333 Chapter 45 Product Specification m 335 Part VII Appendices and Index sese 343 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting ccccccccccccccccecccecceecceecceeceecccesececeneseeeeseeeeeess 345 Appendix B Legal Information ccccccccscccecccecceeceeccceecceeccecccecccecceccceceeeeceeeececeeeseeeeeeeeeeess 353 Appendix C Customer Suppott ccccccccssscscsscccsncececceecececceeceaeceecceeceeeccecceeseaseceeseeeeseeeeeess 357 lir We 363 XGS 4528F User s Guide 21 Table of Contents 22 XGS 4528F User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures Figure T BISIGIHO ADS ai sean eee aac Hen a a dee 36 Figura 2 High Performance Switching 1521 ctun eio eet ensued lh Ete clus ope t eI ERR rA e Ead lU RR SUAE BRE REA E ER 36 Figure 3 Gigabit to the Desktop er 37 Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example ssssscicsssssascatsaseessiacaveasscaasdannsvsaiaddnasssada ien aS 38 Figure 3 Autaching RUDS FSGt Wr me 39 Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackelte oie sassreieesscindissnries icri iro ELI Let Lc e petias 40 Figure 7 Mounting the Switehi n a Rack concedes acon certe ea tad i Noa bap E Eanan ANE EEEa an RB FM BI Ru E UN 41 gj cia sd M
9. DHCP Snooping d Database Status Description Agent URL Write delay timer Abort timer Agent running Delay timer expiry Abort timer expiry Last succeeded time Last failed time Last failed reason Total attempts Startup failures Successful transfers Failed transfers Successful reads Failed reads Successful writes Failed writes Database detail Description First successful access Last ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans Last ignored time Total ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans Status 300 300 None Not Running Not Running None None No failure recorded Times o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Status None o 0 0 0 o0 Confiqure IPS seconds seconds XGS 4528F User s Guide 207 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 DHCP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database You can configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 210 Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database Write delay timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database
10. Classifier and Policy You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address port number or protocol type etc XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 45 Product Specifications Table 142 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Queuing Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Three scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Weighted Round Robin WRR and Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ This allows the Switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes tell the Switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subs
11. Table 101 IP Application gt DHCP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch s DHCP server mode Index This is the index number VID This field displays the VLAN ID for which the Switch is a DHCP server Server Status This field displays the starting DHCP client IP address IP Pool Size This field displays the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to clients Relay Status mode This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch s DHCP relay Relay Mode This field displays VLAN s None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID if it is configured as a relay agent for specific 32 3 DHCP Server Status Detail Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and then click an existing index number of a DHCP server configuration to view the screen as shown Use this screen to view details regarding DHCP server settings configured on the Switch Figure 145 IP Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Server Status Detail Server Status Detai Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Address Leases Index IP Address Timer 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 62 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 254 192 168 5 1 192 168 5 2 Hardware Address DHCP Status
12. ccccccccceceseesecesaeeseeeesseseseseceeeeeseseeeeeees 255 Table 99 Default DSCP IEEE 802 10 Mapping usdsen serere sp pr EERE SERA AR NR PRRXEPLLERFYa PE ER p rxp nte ER aaan LEEA 256 Table 100 IP Application gt DatSery gt DSCP Setting issus optetste eee eodein tote cb E ku 2x EVI Pa videbo sb bo ERR 257 Table 701 IP Applicaton gt DHCP SIUS ui oasis i esto ot pr ERR HR e cid s RE AR o ed aae aa 260 Table 102 IP Application gt DHCP Server Status Detail c cccccccccccececeeseeeesesaeeeeeseseseseseeeeeseeeees 261 Table 103 Relay Agent MormaliOm 262 Table TUS IP Applicaton gt DHCP gt ES OBI arsina cod etiaai eati e ERE avg Ea naa ai aSa aa 262 Table 105 IP Application DHCP VLAN nrsinininnernnr asn R oateensiaiacaannen 265 Table 106 IP Applicaton YRRP SESS saisi aa a Pr n Haa aan Eee a ca aea a a Pads 268 Table 107 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt IP Interface sss 269 Table 108 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt VRRP Parameters ssssssssssee 271 Table 109 VRRP Configuring VRRP Parameters 1 trit tnt teh rond Fed ebd de Mh ede sens 272 Table TIO Management gt Malis Ce s essenbunsrmecntr i niai an cna pert p esi eec rU NH Rex EPHN Ded a om E 279 Table 111 Filename Conventions dudas eua cece id e pD REMIS SEE EE IRA Ia AER dander Citra Rid HEX Gud aonni 283 Table 112 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients sssssssssss
13. ORI SNMP Setting Trap Destination IP z Type Options System coldstart warmstart IV fanspeed temperature voltage V reset timesync intrusionlock loopguard Interface linkup linkdown autonegotiation AMA De authentication accounting IP O I ping I traceroute Switch stp mactable rmon Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 121 Management Access Control SNMP Trap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 35 3 3 on page 287 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Apply Click Apply
14. 5 1 2 Configuring DHCP Server Settings You can set the Switch to assign network information such as the IP address DNS server etc to DHCP clients on the network For the example network configure two DHCP client pools on the Switch for the DHCP clients in the RD and Sales networks 1 Inthe web configurator click IP Jer sauren Status Application and DHCP in the vip 2 navigation panel and click the DHCP Status z se VLAN link Server Client IP Pool Starting Addi 192 168 2 100 2 Inthe VLAN Setting screen EE Size of Client IP Pool 66 specify the ID of the VLAN to IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 which the DHCP clients belong Recs Cameo meiege 72 235 the starting IP address pool a P Secondary DNS Server 172 23 5 2 subnet mask default gateway Relay address and the DNS server Rema DEP Sener dd Remote DHCP Server 2 address es Remote DHCP Sener 3 3 Click Add to save the settings to Semele cin cha ac I option v2 Inte ti the run time memory Settings in aiii E the run time memory are lost EH FERES FESSES EXAMPLE when the Switch s power is turned off XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 1 3 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 21 Initial Setup
15. LOTS Index Destination Gateway Interface Metric Type 1 192 168 1 0 24 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 1 STATIC 2 10 10 10 0 24 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 1 1 STATIC The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 136 Management Routing Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number Destination This field displays the destination IP routing domain Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway device Interface This field displays the IP address of the Interface Metric This field displays the cost of the route Type This field displays the method used to learn the route OSPF added as an OSPF interface RIP learned from incoming RIP packets or STATIC added as a static entry XGS 4528F User s Guide M Chapter 42 Routing Table 322 XGS 4528F User s Guide Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 43 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 201 Management gt Configure Clone amp Configure Clone Source Destination Port Port Features Active Name Speed Duplex BPDU Control Flow Control Basic Setting Intrusion Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control VLAN
16. Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Tree Active Bridge Priority Hello Time MAX Age Forwarding Delay 1 O 32768 EN seconds 20 seconds 5 2 r 32768 v 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 3 O 32768 E seconds po seconds 5 4 r 32768 v 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 Port Active Priority Path Cost Tree GENE NN nn RR n s 1 n 28 RN 1 2 r 28 M 1 i25 ho xl 4 o 128 4 1 5 r ize EN m z foe pmm i 7 128 4 EN a a ee a ad 25 ri 128 2 to BEES ai T 2 T G8 sj 5 E E 28 Oo 128 b 1 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 53 on page 116 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active pu this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an ree Note You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highe
17. XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF In the OSPF Configuration screen click Interface to display the OSPF Interface screen Figure 125 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface Network Area ID Authentication Key ID Key Cost Priority Index Network Area ID 1 192168 1 1 24 192 158 1 1 ORES 192 168 1 1 24 v 192 168 1 1 v None hd Add Cancel Clear Authentication KeyID Cost Priority Delete None 1 15 111 O Delete Cancel Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Select an IP interface Area ID Select the area ID in an IP address format with dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Authentication Note OSPF Interface s must use the same authentication method within the same area Select an authentication method The choices are Same as Area None default Simple and MD5 To participate in an OSPF network you must make the authentication method and or password settings the same as the associated area Select Same as Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set the related fields when necessary Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple and set the Key field to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using simple p
18. m Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re broadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again XGS 4528F User s Guide 221 Chapter 25 Loop Guard The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 113 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard
19. Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 24 6 2 on page 215 XGS 4528F User s Guide 217 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 79 ARP Inspection Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog rate Type the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log Interval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 37 on page 305 to use this Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples 4invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second 6 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 2 the Switch sends 10 syslog messages every 2 s
20. Firmware Upgrade d Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location of the binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path Browse Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting checkbox if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 34 Maintenance 34 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 171 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration E Restore Configuration g Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location ofthe configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup con
21. Remote Management Service Access Control Click Here Click Here Click Here Click Here XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control 35 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 174 SNMP Management Model Manager Fl a Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed Switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed Switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a Switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A
22. 33 3 2 2 Priority Configure the priority level 1 to 254 to set which backup router to take over in case the master router goes down The backup router with the highest priority will take over The priority of the VRRP router that owns the IP address es associated with the virtual router is 255 33 3 2 3 Preempt Mode If the master router is unavailable a backup router assumes the role of the master router However when another backup router with a higher priority joins the network it will preempt the lower priority backup router that is the master Disable preempt mode to prevent this from happening By default a layer 3 device with the same IP address as the virtual router will become the master router regardless of the preempt mode 33 3 3 Configuring VRRP Parameters After you set up an IP interface configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration screen 270 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 33 VRRP Figure 155 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt VRRP Parameters Active Name Network Virtual Router ID Preempt Mode Priority Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Adertisement Interval Secondary Virtual IP name sl E Iv fioo foooo ooo Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 108 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt VRRP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this
23. Advertisement Interval f Preempt Mode iv Priority hoo Uplink Gateway 2211300 Primary Virtual IP 32168121 Secondary Virtual IP oppo Figure 164 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B Active iv Name Example Network 192 168 10 1 24 Virtual Router ID fi Advertisement Interval f Preempt Mode iv Priority o Uplink Gateway 2211100 Primary Virtual IP 32168121 Secondary Virtual IP noon After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration the VRRP Status screens for both switches are shown next 274 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 33 VRRP Figure 165 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch A Aug NND Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 2 Backup Alive 2 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master Alive EXAMPLE Figure 166 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch B Nui Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 2 Master Alive 2 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 1 Backup Alive EXAMPLE XGS 4528F User s Guide 275 Chapter 33 VRRP 276 XGS 4528F User s Guide PART V Management Maintenance 279 Access Control 285 Diagnostic 303 Syslog 305 Cluster Management 309 MAC Table 315 IP Table 317 ARP Table 319 Routing Table 321 Configure Clone 323 277 278 This chapter explains how t
24. C Others SP TPID Hex Role SPVID Norma gt Apply Cancel o 4 ATE The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the Switch SP TPID SP TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Choose 0x8100 or 0x9100 from the drop down list box or select Others and then enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0x0000 to OxFFFF 0x denotes a hexadecimal number It does not have to be typed in the Others text field Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Table 54 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Role Select Normal to have the Switch ignore frames received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority are ignored Select Access Port to have the Switch add the SP TPID tag t
25. E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales zyxel ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia Singapore Support E mail support zyxel com sg Sales E mail sales zyxel com sg Telephone 65 6899 6678 Fax 65 6899 8887 Web http www zyxel com sg Regular Mail ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd No 2 International Business Park The Strategy 03 28 Singapore 609930 Support E mail support zyxel es Sales E mail sales zyxel es Telephone 34 902 195 420 Fax 34 913 005 345 Web www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain XGS 4528F User s Guide Appendix C Customer Support Sweden Support E mail support zyxel se Sales E mail sales zyxel se Telephone 46 3 1 744 7700 Fax 46 31 744 7701 Web www zyxel se Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden Thailand Support E mail support zyxel co th Sales E mail sales zyxel co th Telephone 662 831 5315 Fax 662 831 5395 Web http www zyxel co th Regular Mail ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd 1 1 Moo 2 Ratchaphruk Road Bangrak Noi Muang Nonthaburi 11000 Thailand Ukraine
26. Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control OL EXESEeT i a Active O Port Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s 3 1 c te J ich toe zDI AUTE TTT TTT arg AESA sale iL C Apply Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays a port number 4 Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast pkt s Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save l
27. Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 192 on page 311 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 38 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 192 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen ed Application IP Application Management Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Syslog MAC Table IP Table ARP Table Routing Table Configure Clone Cluster Management Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Management System Info VLAN Stati
28. configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE 802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 11 on page 78 for more information BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this po
29. 73 Advanced Setup E Pa 85 om erc mer P 87 Saio MAC Foward Roi oM 103 nim M 105 acus Auigsrs ec ER 107 risu CONTO e D 127 IGA ST LCN C ONDON t 129 E E E e P TTE T E E UU UR AE E E 131 Mir UT 133 Por AUTENC 41 din ch id ea cR b d p co a d bob t C LE Ba oe tat ad 141 FOI SEGUE aiiis eather dien d dam ductus gu leaned spade us decet e i dab m esas cata 147 cup M e eee ree 151 xq e i 157 Cunina KoT e deasacaeen ap bane cap Oaa 163 VLAN Eccl 167 LIE TU SSE neo ee De py eee ones Areonee Mer ean Vesey Ono one erm Lens a rr 173 Auhonicalon P Piero RR E o S err rer rr TOSS 187 IP SOUS GUIU MEET 201 UP POLI M tT 221 IF ABDICSUDEE E A dl YA Mu RU E TT TE N ER REPE RR ERU EM MU E 225 DEDE eese Eee ne nce Te NEN Cee eek ty MMe taeda i on cte nt e tech sete iau CLU Ael 227 ii nee re TTE 220 S II 231 INE suicides PEE EU eer erst 243 I E scandit ed dedico EFE Eon Ra ehe bubo s LAG oO ac Fr PUEDE Miri dz Voas e bord cse ET LI da 247 XGS 4528F User s Guide 9 Contents Overview lp 251 Tal E E TE tea pui di EUR PA GU REN GG GU SR EA beta DE EOD CH Lu EDU CR EGLI LO I A REE E
30. Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 122 Management gt Access Control gt Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see Chapter 44 on page 333 User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control 35 4 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit
31. It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch 22 1 4 IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 22 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 22 1 on page 173 for more information on multicasting Figure 81 Advanced Application gt Multicast OMSK Multicast Sett
32. Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting In this screen activate trunking group T1 and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Figure 65 Trunking Example Configuration Screen c OMEIA Status LACP Group ID Active T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 0 0 0 0 OF Port Group Apply Cancel EXAMPLE Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete you do not need to go to any additional screens XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation XGS 4528F User s Guide Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x and MAC authentication methods 16 1 Port Authentication Overview BS 16 1 1 Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication IEEE 802 1x An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user MAC An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address and password of the client Both types of authentication use the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 23 1 2 on page 188 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server se
33. Lot EILILILILI LIEILILILI EIEIEIEIE ee e e e o S8 2 8 3 3 3 8 5 S S R a 2 rrrerEEE r EI EI EI FE r1 mi 2 0 0 0 0 Oo n 22 ppp 33 B B E 24 1 pn pp n m Iv 9 10 1 11231 15 14 15 1161 17 18 19 1201 21 22 23 1 244 25 126 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each
34. Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Reserved Multicast Group Multicast addresses 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for the local scope For examples 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts in this subnet 224 0 0 2 is for all multicast routers in this subnet etc A router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range See the IANA website for more information Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number
35. navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration IP Interface Use these fields to create or edit IP routing domains on the Switch IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 This is the IP address of the Switch in an IP routing domain IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of an IP routing domain in dotted decimal notation for Mask example 255 255 255 0 VID Enter the VLAN identification number to which an IP routing domain belongs Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of an entry IP Address This field displays IP address of the Switch in the IP domain IP Subnet This field displays the subnet mask of the Switch in the IP domain Mask VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the IP domain on the Switch Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Note Deleting all IP subnets locks you out of the Switch Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 7 7 Port Setup Use th
36. o Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 37 2 Syslog Setup Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 37 Syslog Figure 188 Management gt Syslog NK Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active Logging type Active Facility System Vv localuse 0 Interface Vv local use 0 v Switch Vv localuse 0 v AAA Vv local use 0 v IP Vv local use 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 127 Management gt Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when y
37. packets that each port can receive per second 4 Configure static bindings 24 1 2 ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 99 Example Man in the middle Attack In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things It pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B It pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 1 2 1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 10 on page 105 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use They appea
38. seconds 6 On 5600 seconds 7 On 3600 seconds XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauthentication Specify the length of time required to pass before a client has to re enter his or her Timer username and password to stay connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the
39. specified VID XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 5 1 Static VLAN Status See Section 8 1 on page 87 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 32 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status ONBVENEIUINENP VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 3 49 44 Static Change Pages Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch VLAN Index This is the VLAN index number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen 8 5 2 Static VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN g
40. supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device XGS 4528F User s Guide Safety Warnings This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly XGS 4528F User s Guide Safety Warnings XGS 4528F User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Introductio eee M 33 SUE TO OWE WIT NE TRI 35 Hardware Installation and Connection iss siier dois s soca senders cas avnus tk x 04 EX GERE RAE aiaiai iiaa Raat 39 guts 4 uU mM 43 rtipX ecgtgu e 49 Hi cresce M 51 IPIS SOIN BOOTS asa cene en A EPOR DE cH bU P A FERA AREE CURED bA HK BELA tali Ead 61 System Status amd Port Statistics 1 co poser ebrei a p EFE Pisos E PRISE N ad 67 rr weld UL
41. top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 2 2 Activate MAC Authentication Use this screen to activate MAC authentication In the Port Authentication screen click MAC Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication CE MAC Authentication J Port Authentication Active O Name Prefix Password zyxel Timeout o Port Active SN On 4 WH Ooo ooio oo Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for authentication You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters If you leave this field blank then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the RADIUS server Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for authentication with the RADIUS server You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII charact
42. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 El Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 t Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 T 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 10150 11177 0 0 0 0 64 3 47 52 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 uM Down STOP Disabled 7180 10419 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 n Dawn STOP Nisabled n n n mnn z l 35 9 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen Figure 185 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control Service Access Contro Access Control Services Active Serice Port Timeout Telnet Iv 3 SSH v b2 FTP v 1 HTTP e o Minutes HTTPS iv 443 I
43. 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B XGS 4528F User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 212 Subnetting Example After Subnetting 1 A LE I B D P E3 mo SN i I LE CS hs 5 pos H P T Internet gt a n B TM P i P i i i 9 192 168 1 0 25 4 W192 168 1 128 ue a mumumumumum um eom um um um um um um In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 1
44. Alive EXAMPLE Figure 161 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch B OCG Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 1 Backup Alive EXAMPLE 33 4 2 Two Subnets Example The following figure depicts an example in which two switches share the network traffic Hosts in the two network groups use different default gateways Each switch is configured to backup a virtual router using VRRP You wish to configure switch A as the master router for virtual router VR1 and as a backup for virtual router VR2 On the other hand switch B is the master for VR2 and a backup for VR1 XGS 4528F User s Guide 273 Chapter 33 VRRP Figure 162 VRRP Configuration Example Two Virtual Router Network 172 21 1 1 192 168 1 20 Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 am L un ee me USSSA VRID 2 OO O 192 168 1 21 172 21 1 100 me m ane Default Gateway 192 168 1 21 zar 172 21 1 10 You need to configure the VRRP Configuration screen for virtual router VR2 on each switch while keeping the VRRP configuration in example 1 for virtual router VR1 refer to Section 33 4 2 on page 273 Configure the VRRP parameters on the switches as shown in the figures below Figure 163 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A Active iv Name Example2 Network 192 168 1 1 24 Virtual Router ID fi
45. Certificate Authority CA that is a trusted CA on the Switch Please refer to the following figure 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Figure 180 HTTPS Implementation WS 443 HTTPS HTTP BES If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 35 8 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access 35 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked Figure 181 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer x Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or Q changed by others However there is a problem with the site s secu
46. Change the DSCP value Set Out Drop Precedence Outof profile action Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Metering 1000 Kbps E Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Classifier s Delete Cancel Delete EXAMPLE XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule XGS 4528F User s Guide Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 20 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth 20 1 1 Strictly Priority Strictly Priority SP services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 20 1 2 Weighted Fair
47. Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 352 XGS 4528F User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change wi
48. MAC address of a device Link State Database Link ID This field displays the ID of a router or subnet ADV Router This field displays the IP address of the layer 3 device that sends the LSAs Age This field displays the time in seconds since the last LSA was sent Seq This field displays the link sequence number of the LSA Checksum This field displays the checksum value of the LSA Link Count This field displays the number of links in the LSA 28 3 OSPF Configuration Use this screen to activate OSPF and set general settings Click IP Application gt OSPF and the Configuration link to display the OSPF Configuration screen See Section 28 1 on page 23 for more information on OSPF XGS 4528F User s Guide 235 Chapter 28 OSPF Figure 122 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings OEE q Interface Virtual Link Status oe Active E m Router ID 0 0 0 0 Redistribute Route Active Type Metric value RIP iv 1B 15 Static iv 1B 15 w Apply Cancel p Name name Area ID 0 0 0 0 Authentication None Stub Network E No Summary O Default route cost 15 Add Cancel Clear Index Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete Delete Cancel The follow table describes the related labels in this screen Table 89 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Active OSPF is disabled b
49. Network Example VLAN UN Y lt gt z a M acm 1 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link Index VID Elapsed Time 1 1 1 00 31 Change Pages Previous Next Pa van status VLAN Port Setting Erie vay The Number of VLAN 1 Status Static 2 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network ED Static v aD pw am fw ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal TI Control 1 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden T Tagging MOTT xed orbigde v X duin C Fixed C Fixed C Fixed C Fixed C Fixed i VLAN Status Vv Example 2 Tagging C Forbidden M TxTagging Forbidden M TxTagging C Forbidden M Tx Tagging Forbidden C Forbidden i XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example BS screen refer to the same VLAN ID The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 5 1 4 Sett To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags
50. OCTET LAST OCTET SUBNET MASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 XGS 4528F User s Guide 347 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 148 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued suner wask AURA ARGS SERRE 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 2 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 211 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting Gc EB EM EM EM EM EN NN EN EN EN EN EN NN EN M i i I I mi a Y 1 Internet t JU H Ol I li I li I lil I 0 I li y 192 168 1 0 24 a a LE E Amo m um um m um Um Um Em Em um um You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now
51. SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authentication Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following DES Data Encryption Standard is a widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 35 3 5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group From the SNMP screen click Trap Group to view the screen as shown Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Figure 176 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group
52. SSH sssssssssssseeeeenee 198 Table 69 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console sssssssssssssseee enne 198 Tabie 0 IP Source Gua e 205 Table 71 IF Source Guard Statie BINdiINg e 206 Toe T2 DPCP WE cca in cs m 208 Table 73 DHCP Snooping Configure 2 0 1 iiie iniiai rettet hdd dat nid erue ddp rud da 210 Table 74 DHCP Snooping Port GOTIBBEBI 22 cti decia deo t pe Ud ede a edd a dta t d o t t d 212 Table 75 DACP Snooping YLAN CORB scnsconiraniiin anii nE NR 213 His Xi ARP WAS IGA SIAS ETT 214 Tue 77 ARP IMS OCG vVLAM SIUS srini vs cease baa ag a ates Ea ad ELE EIE LEE GRAUE KE dU sedan 215 Tabs T9 ABP Inspecuo LOS SUUS eeranapn a amuses tee tq aan 216 Tabio 79 ARP Der e lei CONIBUEG accu pad sank con ies edt pt nda so atl p tend oaa t Ua da Rd 217 Table 80 ARP Inspection Port Configure ieeiiia neret hr dnt htnc dne oh d Ra ERR RAE Ra d dd 219 Table 81 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure 112 5 ttcricrs itat ttt terna hebt ttt VoU sd dae x bra R 220 XGS 4528F User s Guide List of Tables Table 82 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard i e ie ttt ore ro d SIR ERR Lebe ti pa egal aod 223 Table BS IP Applicaton State ROUNO is sad pa tera is E CE FERA maadena RIRT LAE EE KREIS E aaa SANE LERRA UE REA 227 Table ga seris pire
53. Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 8 on page 87 for more information Bridge Control Select Active to allow the Switch to handle bridging control protocols STP for Protocol example You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Port Setup screen Transparency MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address Learning learning to occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See Chapter 8 on page 87 for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See Chapter 8 on page 87 for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time se
54. Table 45 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated Name bs field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purposes only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 46 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Some of the most common IP ports are Table 47 Common IP Ports PORT NUMBER PORT NAME 21 FTP 23 Telnet 25 SMTP 53 DNS 80 HTTP 110 POP3 18 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example of configuring a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 Figure 74 Classifier Example Classifier Ac
55. The default administrator password is 1234 access the The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct web password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password configurator and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the password If you have configured more than one IP interface make sure another administrator is NOT logged into the web configurator on a different IP interface using the same account Check that you have enabled web service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details Your computer s and the Switch s IP addresses must be on the same subnet See the following section to check that pop up windows JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed XGS 4528F User s Guide 327 Chapter 44 Troubleshooting 44 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default BES Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary 44 2 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your
56. Time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall wnen many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in
57. Trunking Example Configuration Sereen wcccccccisscaseseustnneccevstseannaauusteneaswuniveneaswnertennacuuavveines 139 Figure 66 IEEE 802 1x Authentication PETOCOBS 5st a rae Pai ante deed i Ka d Et da dta 142 Figure Gr MAC Aulheniication PERO 1c ote I Epp eee PEE bptqH Rep brH M FEE EID pub EUR ADIPE bED d crt a 142 Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnneaees 143 Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x ssssssssssssseseeeeee 143 Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication sssssssss 145 Figure 71 Advanced Application gt Port SeCUrihy 1 4 pad Pret nE d Reda hae ta ate 148 Figure 72 Advanced Application Classifier Liens ieece e bh rhet ERR FH A e HLLE repa IRR kaa aauina E LER TE UVR E kadad 152 Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table sseee 154 Figura 74 Cassii EXIN oeil eco insures Budec n a Fa n n dae n Fir a RU Aaa a Ead taeda e Rena a EK 155 Figure 75 Advanced Application Policy RUIG sess e pppa a AREE EH Iu NR kenn niiin eeu EH ed eeekbp Poe ee eaS 158 Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table eceeeeeeeeeeenenn enne 160 gU T Poley IE i etm 161 Figure 78 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method rre rr trente t tarea eet erp a reh Etre eA an Enpa 164 Figure 79 VLAN Slack
58. VRRP entry Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Network Select an IP domain to which this VRRP entry applies Virtual Router ID Select a virtual router number 1 to 7 for which this VRRP entry is created You can configure up to seven virtual routers for one network Advertisement Interval Specify the number of seconds between Hello message transmissions The default is 1 Preempt Mode Select this option to activate preempt mode Priority Enter a number between 1 and 254 to set the priority level The bigger the number the higher the priority This field is 100 by default Uplink Gateway Enter the IP address of the uplink gateway in dotted decimal notation The Switch checks the link to the uplink gateway Primary Virtual IP Enter the IP address of the primary virtual router in dotted decimal notation Secondary Virtual IP This field is optional Enter the IP address of a secondary virtual router in dotted decimal notation This field is ignored when you enter 0 0 0 0 Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table Clear Click Clear to s
59. a EU 295 23 5 How SSH WO ecce ior EIER ANAE RH ERREUR CE edad d potet ads 295 XGS 4528F User s Guide Table of Contents 35 6 SSH Implementation on the SHWE sasesana aa ENEAN 296 35 6 1 Requirements Tor Using SSH RT 296 sod Introduction to HI ITPS qr 296 25 8 og ete ado 118 coger re eer bee e a A ANE aE 297 35 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages ua ciere tet er sania sa cersteraancacvenndsncceivieceessteones 297 35 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages eeeeeeeeesesess enne tenerent ananas 298 SUF NU d celi TIO OO OT S OT 298 OUR EccauncHIuelss caeso MEM m 299 29 IO Romo NABSDSIMOE Quoten ddl ped CORR UO ROGO OUR n OH RR RU Re DU 300 Chapter 36 eeen r et Te TP NE 303 CUN BEI scii oue RE 303 Chapter 37 ro S S T T 305 SAEC RR Dci T 305 uio DUO UMN coi eta dude Epl a ec A EO M RU et bata Gta ngs adres E AE EAA URP TER LEER RUD MA 305 Sr ECEC VU aeui o 306 Chapter 38 DMITEL TIMIDI EODEM 309 38 1 Clustering Management Status Overview esee saneti tha a nas Esta xxu In aA 309 30 2 Cluster Management SIAS eee p Ht 310 38 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management escena annon hn dana anna 311 38 3 Clustering Management Configuration sees esent nnn innt nnn nna 312 Chapter 39 MAC TAD me A EA M m 315 39 1 INI RI s 31
60. a direct connection with each other Therefore they should not be allowed to become DR or BDR Only router A should become the DR 232 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF Figure 120 OSPF Router Election Example A Cha J _ _ You can assign a priority to an interface which determines whether this router will be elected to be a DR or BDR The router with the highest priority becomes the DR while a router with a priority of 0 does not participate in router elections In Figure 120 on page 233 you can assign a priority of 0 to routers B and C thereby ensuring they do not become DR or BDR and assign a priority of 1 to router A to make sure that it does become the DR 28 1 5 Configuring OSPF To configure OSPF on the Switch do the following tasks 1 Enable OSPF 2 Create OSPF areas 3 Create and associate interface s to an area 4 Create virtual links to maintain backbone connectivity 28 2 OSPF Status Use this screen to view current OSPF status Click IP Application gt OSPF in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next See Section 28 1 on page 231 for more information on OSPF XGS 4528F User s Guide 233 Chapter 28 OSPF Figure 121 IP Application gt OSPF Status OSPF Status Configuration Interface IVLINK0 is down line protocol is down OSPF is enabled but not running on this interface swifZ is up line protocol is up Internet Address 192 168 1 10 24 Area 192 168 1 1 R
61. an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allows only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 17 on page 147 for more information on port security Click Advanced Applications gt Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 43 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding Static MAC Forwarding Active O Name MAC Address VID Port Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age o
62. and specify from which source multicast server it wants to receive multicast packets Alternatively a multicast host can specify from which multicast servers it does not want to receive multicast packets In the following figure multicast server X IP address 10 1 1 1 and multicast server Z IP address 13 2 2 2 both send multicast traffic to the same multicast group identified by the multicast IP address 225 1 1 1 In IGMP version 3 multicast host A can join multicast group 225 1 1 1 and specify that it only wants to receive multicast packets from server X Figure 130 IGMP Version 3 Example Z 7 Group 225 1 1 1 ca Server 10 1 1 1 Group 225 1 1 1 Ii Il Server 13 2 2 2 Join 225 1 1 1 Include 10 1 1 1 29 2 Port based IGMP The Switch sends IGMP Query packets to all ports The Switch then listens for IGMP Report packets and it records which port the messages came from It then delivers multicast traffic to only those ports from which it received a request to join a multicast group 29 3 Configuring IGMP Click IP Application gt IGMP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 7 6 on page 79 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 29 IGMP Figure 131 IP Application gt IGMP e oan d Active Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding Drop
63. are the switches being managed by the cluster manager switch In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 38 Cluster Management Figure 190 Clustering Application Example 38 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following Screen BS A cluster can only have one manager Figure 191 Management gt Cluster Management a Management Status Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 01 1fb0 Configuration The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name T 00 13 49 ae fb 7a ES 2024PWR Status Online XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 38 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 130 Management gt Cluster Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following Member fields describe the cluster member switches
64. are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Type the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Saving
65. as shown Figure 141 IP Application gt DiffServ 4 OMT m 2 rate 3 Color Marker DSCP Setting Active oO Port Active 7 1 m 2 C 3 C 4 0 5 m 6 O 7 r ee d a a Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 IP Application gt DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings Use this screen to configure TRTCM settings Click the 2 rate 3 Color Marker link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services You c
66. bO dana ER CO IR RAER AUI RA 69 Tete 9 Basic Sete Sy SNS c M 74 Table TU Basic Setting gt General SODpi us cie eer Urat tbn kA RA EEB EP qaa o3 LER Heu DURER Rea E LE He Ei EVE sistent EN ER d dS 75 Table 41 Basic Setting gt Switch SOMME auuuccsdueceeertida pet cipit erede st uetke dd dart tt adde Ea 78 Table 12 Basie Senin ees aia in eb ee eS 80 Table 12 Basic Saiting F on SOUS P 82 Table 14 IEEE 802 10 VLAN TermminolOgy cccrtcascaccctcouecccorsteidccsts anccccaeautuebeusesauteceneansercewauseesededueesteneay 88 Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status seseesessesesssssseseeeneenennnnenn nnn nnne 90 Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail 20 0 0 cccccccssesessesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeseseeeeseens 91 Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN 1n erben Lo nt n RN Fer e Ro poen 92 Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting c cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneteees 93 Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup 95 Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup 98 Table 21 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup c cccccccccceceeseeeeaeaeaeeeeeseeeeeeens 102 Table 22 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding sess 104 Table 23 Advanced Application gt F
67. below the normal operating range TemperatureEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the temperature returns to the normal operating range voltage VoltageEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the voltage goes above or below the normal operating range VoltageEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the voltage returns to the normal operating range reset UncontrolledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch automatically resets ControlledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch resets by an administrator through a management interface RebootEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 2 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by an administrator through a management interface timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch fails to get the time and date from a time server RTCNotUpdatedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the Switch gets the time and date from a time server intrusionlock IntrusionLockEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when intrusion lock occurs on a port loopguard LoopguardEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts down a
68. connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch Figure 67 MAC Authentication Process eee IM New Connection Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication 16 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication method s you want to use both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the Auth and Acct gt Radius Server Setup screen To activate a port authentication method click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel Select a port authentication method in the screen that appears Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication ED Port Authentication g 802 1x MAC Authentication Click here Click here 16 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x DIAD Port Authentication Active r1 Port Active Reauthentication Reauthentication Timer j D On gt seconds 1 On gt 3600 seconde 2 On gt 3600 seconde 3 On E500 seconds 4 On 600 Lande 5 On 3600
69. default Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default Click OK to close the window ona Rh WN XGS 4528F User s Guide 331 Chapter 44 Troubleshooting Figure 207 Security Settings Java Scripting Settings 125 Scripting 3 poe a E Allow paste operations via script O Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt amp SURG of Java applets OQ Prompt Lleaw Aukhantiostian z Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset Le se 44 2 1 3 Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Microsoft VM Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected Click OK to close the window a fF 0 N Figure 208 Security Settings Java Security Settings 24xl Settings Q Disable 9 Enable EX Font download Disable 9 Enable i Q Prompt 3 Microsoft vM 5 Java permissions o Custom Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset E 332 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 44 Troubleshooting 44 2 1 3 1 JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 209 Java Sun General Security P
70. device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address 44 2 1 1 1 Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 202 Pop up Blocker Mail and News bj Pop up Blocker Turn Off Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Settings Synchronize oe ot I Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 44 Troubleshooting Figure 203 Internet Options Internet Options PIR General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings f Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up window
71. devices such as switches routers computers print servers and so on Figure 3 Gigabit to the Desktop pu Internet 1 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Example A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one or more groups With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 8 on page 87 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increasing network performance by reducing broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example VLAN 1 t l b L i a 1 i 3 L E I 1 a 1 a 1 a LI 1 2 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a supported
72. enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 114 Loop Guard Probe Packet The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 115 Loop Guard Network Loop 222 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 25 Loop Guard LES After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator see Section 7 7 on page 81 or via commands see Section 44 12 4 on page 377 25 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown BS The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanni
73. for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANS that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering PVID Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All and Tag Only Frame Type Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you a
74. getting help 60 home 52 login 51 logout 60 navigation panel 53 screen summary 54 weight queuing 164 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 164 WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing 164 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 164 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 283 XGS 4528F User s Guide 371 Index 372 XGS 4528F User s Guide
75. given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 31 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 137 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping The DSCP value determines the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets as it is forwarded a
76. gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port Leave Timeout Enter an IGMP leave timeout value from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received from a host 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that you want to allow to XGS 4528F User s Guide join multicast groups Chapter 22 Multicast Table 56 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame
77. in decimal Table 145 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example OCTET OCTET OCTET Se TOE 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111114 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes XGS 4528F User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 146 Subnet Masks BINARY DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET SUl OGEN 8 bitmask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bitmask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bitmask 11111111 11111111 11111141 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the
78. is always available In VRRP a virtual router VR represents a number of physical layer 3 devices An IP address is associated with the virtual router A layer 3 device having the same IP address is the preferred master router while the other Layer 3 devices are the backup routers The master router forwards traffic for the virtual router When the master router becomes unavailable a backup router assumes the role of the master router until the master router comes back up and takes over The following figure shows a VRRP network example with the switches A and B implementing one virtual router VR1 to ensure the link between the host X and the uplink gateway G Host X is configured to use VR1 192 168 1 20 as the default gateway If switch A has a higher priority it is the master router Switch B having a lower priority is the backup router Figure 152 VRRP Example 1 192 168 1 1 Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 172 21 1 1 VRID 1 192 168 1 20 acc G 172 21 1 10 192 168 1 10 172 21 1 10 XGS 4528F User s Guide 267 Chapter 33 VRRP If switch A the master router is unavailable switch B takes over Traffic is then processed by switch B 33 2 VRRP Status Click IP Application gt VRRP in the navigation panel to display the VRRP Status screen as shown next Figure 153 IP Application gt VRRP Status ED VRRP aD Configuration index Network VRID VR Status Uplink Statu
79. is an IETF standard for distributing data to multiple recipients The following figure shows a multicast session and the relationship between a multicast server multicast routers and multicast hosts A multicast server transmits multicast packets and multicast routers forward multicast packets to multicast hosts Figure 127 IP Multicast Multicast Routers Hosts A host can decide to join or leave a multicast group at any time A host can also be a member of more than one multicast group Multicast groups are identified by IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 A multicast server sends packets addressed to a particular multicast group multicast IP address XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 29 IGMP IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is used by multicast hosts to indicate their multicast group membership to multicast routers Multicast routers can also use IGMP to periodically check if multicast hosts still want to receive transmission from a multicast server In other words multicast routers check if any hosts on their network are still members of a specific multicast group The Switch supports IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 version 2 IGMP v2 and IGMP version 3 IGMP v3 Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively At start up the Switch queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the Switch periodically updates t
80. is kept separate 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANSs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Figure 79 VLAN Stacking Example A A VLAN 24 VLAN 24 N amers VLAN 24 B 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN t
81. learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information Digest This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Changed Times Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the
82. marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 19 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule 19 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 18 2 on page 151 for more
83. maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs ofall zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 147 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 242 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216_2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 20102 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 0925 6 Notation Since the mask 1s always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 148 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ALTERNATIVE LAST
84. means this feature is disabled XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security Table 43 Advanced Application gt Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security XGS 4528F User s Guide Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch 18 1 About the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a
85. memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click this to clear the fields Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you
86. memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 5 on page 109 for more information on MSTP XGS 4528F User s Guide E Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol BS This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 57 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP CST Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8000 000000000000 Hello Time second D 2 Max Age second 0 20 Forwarding Delay second 0 15 Cost to Bridge 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 Configuration Name 001349000002 Revision Number 0 Configuration Digest A317523DB32DA2D62 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 Ins
87. more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control Screen Figure 186 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management NIGUDIGRBLENEFRDNIN NN Secured Client Setup Access Control Entry Active Start Address End Address Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS 1 Ww oo foooo e Ww NW VW RW KR FM 2 pn pao poe o o o o o GO 3 n oo poo o o n O n oO n 4 0 aoo foo OD o o o o oO mn Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 124 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this End Address Switch The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Table 124 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management cont
88. number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 210 Information Select this to have the Switch add the system name to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can configure the system name in the General Setup screen See Chapter 7 on page 73 You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 210 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XGS 4528F User s Guide EJ Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 6 ARP Inspection Status Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 106 ARP Inspection Status
89. of IP addresses along with subnet masks DNS server and default gateway information and distribute them to your LAN computers Ifthere is already a DHCP server on your network then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer 32 1 2 DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can be configured as a DHCP server for one VLAN and at the same time the Switch can be configured to relay DHCP requests for clients in another VLAN XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP 32 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays Figure 144 P Application gt DHCP Status ED DHCP Status d Server Status index VID 1 2 Server Status 192 168 2 100 56 Relay Status Relay Mode VLAN 1 3 IP Pool Size VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen
90. of the ARP packet See Section 24 7 2 on page 219 Time This field displays when the log message was generated XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 7 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Figure 109 ARP Inspection Configure c OF Inspection Configure as o Aa VLAN ARP Inspection Active E Filter Aging Time Filter aging time 300 seconds Log Profile Log buffer size 32 entries Syslog rate 5 entries Log interval 1 seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 ARP Inspection Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Type O if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile
91. on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 314 XGS 4528F User s Guide MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen 39 1 MAC Table Overview The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports When a device which may belong to a VLAN group sends a packet which is forwarded to a port on the Switch the MAC address of the device is shown on the Switch s MAC Table It also shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC Table to determine how to forward frames See the following f
92. on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide DVMRP This chapter introduces DVMRP and tells you how to configure it 30 1 DVMRP Overview DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a protocol used for routing multicast data within an autonomous system AS This DVMRP implementation is based on draft ietf idmr dvmrp v3 10 DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol with IP Multicast support and the IGMP protocol The DVMRP metric is a hop count of 32 IGMP is a protocol used for joining or leaving a multicast group You must have IGMP enabled when you enable DVMRP otherwise you see the screen as in Figure 134 on page 249 30 2 How DVMRP Works DVMRP uses the Reverse Path Multicasting RPM algorithm to generate an IP Multicast delivery tree Multicast packets are forwarded along these multicast tree branches DVMRP dynamically learns host membership information using Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP The trees are updated dynamically to track the membership of individual groups 1 Initially an advertisement multicast packet is broadcast B in the following figure 2 DVMRP enabled Layer 3 devices that do not have any hosts in their networks that belong to this multicast group send back a
93. other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports An egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Static MAC Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 9 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 9 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is
94. panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide PART IV IP Application Static Route 227 RIP 229 OSPF 231 IGMP 243 DVMRP 247 Differentiated Services 251 DHCP 259 VRRP 267 Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 26 1 Configuring Static Routing Static routes tell the Switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Click IP Application gt Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 117 IP Application gt Static Routing XIEGDECUSLD NEN Active a Name a Destination IP Address booo IP Subnet Mask booo Gateway IP Address mono Metric Index Active 1 Yes Name Example Add Cancel Clear Metric Delete 2 DH Gateway Address 192 168 1 2 Destination Address Subnet Mask 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 83 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the fin
95. plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured 11 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1
96. port Table 116 SNMP InterfaceTraps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up LinkDownEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down 288 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Table 116 SNMP InterfaceTraps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION n autonegotiation AutonegotiationFailedEventO 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface fails to auto negotiate with the peer Ethernet interface ear AutonegotiationFailedEventCl 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface auto negotiates with the peer Ethernet interface Table 117 AAA Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authentication authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password On RADIUSNotReachableE
97. port Tx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Table 8 Status gt Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX Packets This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast Packets received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received Control This field shows the number of control packets received i
98. port security 147 address learning 148 limit MAC address learning 148 MAC address learning 147 overview 147 setup 147 223 port setup 81 port status 67 port VLAN trunking 89 port based VLAN 99 all connected 102 port isolation 102 settings wizard 102 ports standby 133 diagnostics 303 mirroring 131 speed duplex 83 power voltage 75 power specification 335 power status 75 priority level 79 priority and OSPF 233 priority queue assignment 79 product registration 355 protocol based VLAN 96 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 96 example 98 hexadecimal notation for protocols 95 98 isolate traffic 96 priority 95 98 PVID 87 93 PVID Priority Frame 87 Q QoS 339 and classifier 151 queue weight 164 queuing 163 SPQ 164 WFQ 164 WRR 164 queuing method 163 165 R RADIUS 188 advantages 188 and authentication 188 Network example 187 server 188 settings 188 setup 188 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 107 reboot load configuration 281 reboot system 281 redistribute route 236 registration product 355 related documentation 3 remote management 300 service 301 trusted computers 300 resetting 59 280 to factory default settings 280 restoring configuration 59 282 Reverse Path Forwarding RPF 248 Reverse Path Multicasting RPM 247 RFC 3164 305 RIP configuration 229 direction 229 overview 229 version 229 vs OSPF 231 RIP Routing Information Protocol 229 Round Robin Scheduling 164 rou
99. priority 115 118 port state 108 root port 108 status 116 119 123 terminology 107 vs loop guard 221 stub area 231 238 stub area See also OSPF 238 subnet 345 subnet based VLANs 94 and DHCP VLAN 95 and priority 94 configuration 95 subnet mask 346 subnetting 348 switch lockout 58 switch reset 59 switch setup 77 switching 339 syntax conventions 4 syslog 204 305 protocol 305 server setup 306 settings 305 setup 305 severity levels 305 system information 73 system log 303 system reboot 281 I TACACS 188 setup 190 TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 187 tagged VLAN 87 temperature 335 temperature indicator 74 time current 76 time zone 76 Time RFC 868 76 time server 76 time service protocol 76 format 76 Time To Live TTL 249 XGS 4528F User s Guide Index 370 trademarks 353 transceiver installation 44 removal 45 traps destination 291 troubleshooting 327 accessing the switch 327 accessing the web configurator 327 password problems 333 start up 327 TRTCM and bandwidth control 255 and DiffServ 255 color aware mode 253 color blind mode 253 setup 254 trunk group 133 trunking 133 339 example 138 trusted ports ARP inspection 204 DHCP snooping 202 Tunnel Protocol Attribute and RADIUS 196 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM 252 Two Rate Three Color Marker see TRTCM 252 Type of Service ToS 251 U untrusted ports ARP inspection 204
100. priority and data the lowest Figure 36 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example T Cs Internet ds Untagged Frames hu NI L EN m 10 1 1 0 24 VID 300 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 7 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN Click Subnet Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown LES Subnet based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Figure 37 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN CE Subnet Based VLAN J Vlan Port Setting Active D DHCP Vlan Override O Apply Active r1 Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Add Cancel Index Active Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch DHCP Vlan When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address through Override the DHCP VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN Select this checkbox to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or los
101. purposes Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field General Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Out of Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 63 if you want to replace or remark the Profile DSCP number for out of profile traffic DSCP Action Specify the action s the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priorit
102. row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to activate TRTCM on the port Commit Rate Specify the Commit Information Rate CIR for this port XGS 4528F User s Guide 255 Chapter 31 Differentiated Services Table 98 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Peak Rate Specify the Peak Information Rate PIR for this port DSCP Use this section to specify the DSCP values that you want to assign to packets based on the color they are marked via TRTCM green Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority yellow Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority red Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 4 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure
103. se tuluden sere pa e xkH ed et erbuba eec oer posed cete a gana bubo Pede FED HARE BUR 253 Figure EE ITE Me E AN 254 Figure 142 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker ssssessseeeeeeneree 255 Figure 143 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting 121i tear thanh aa eani tuba epa iia nias 256 Figure 144 IP Application gt DHCP SEIS Ls ii drer tht odo TER HER er Ea e obs Dod EXER adaa 260 Figure 145 IP Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Server Status Detail sssssssssssssssssss 260 Figure 146 IP Application DHCP gt Global 25 notti erIi tut aneen ia ianen 262 Figure 147 Global DHCP Relay Network Example eeeeeseuiesna sehen than anth ua Etha nna Eta 263 Figure 149 DHCP Relay Configuration Example i255 x tate re EP o perpe Pa Eee br YF e E eRpeT rer orER Ede R 263 Figure 149 IP Application c DHOPO VLAN iue td ertt ERR see Laa 264 Figure 150 DHCP Relay for Two VLANS ssi cacaieuss saci cadioss dba senadebul Feri tbe bdo id Factete ku Edad dea 266 Figure 151 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example sees 266 Figure 152 WAR EXIIT Lausssssesseexie ebbe EPOR YHRREDUSHN ERE GON UR CER EROR ARCU EU ALES Rad 267 Figure 153 IF Application gt VRRP SSIBTUS cria rece e Ep Ina ina FRU QU FUHR PCHE RED N nego E RENE eoe yE FR OD ex EATE TRU EROS 268 Figure 154 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt IP Interface sssm 269 Figure 155 IP
104. sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 41 2 Viewing the ARP Table Click Management gt ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 41 ARP Table Figure 199 Management gt ARP Table ONANI Index IP Address MAC Address Type 1 VEZ 240 2 00 05 50 04 30 f71 dynamic Fi 172 21 3 16 00 05 1c 15 08 71 dynamic 3 172 21 3 18 00 0b cd 8c 6d ed dynamic 4 172 21 3 40 00 0c 76 07 41 0d dynamic 5 172 21 3 66 00 50 8d 47 73 4f dynamic 6 172 21 3 90 00 05 5d f4 49 20 dynamic 7 172 21 3 91 00 50 ba ad 55 7c dynamic 8 172 21 3 95 00 10 b5 ae 56 97 dynamic g 172 21 3 120 00 10 65 ae 62 32 dynamic 10 172 21 3 138 0
105. settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 64 Trunking Example Physical Connections 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt
106. state database and Dijkstra algorithm to compute the least cost paths to network destinations Layer 3 devices build a synchronized link state database by exchanging Hello messages to confirm which neighbor layer 3 devices exist and then they exchange database descriptions DDs to create the link state database The link state database is constantly updated through LSAs Link State Advertisements 28 1 3 Interfaces and Virtual Links An OSPF interface is a link between a layer 3 device and an OSPF network An interface has state information an IP address and subnet mask associated with it When you configure an OSPF interface you first set an interface to transmit OSPF traffic and add the interface to an area You can configure a virtual link to establish maintain connectivity between a non backbone area and the backbone The virtual link must be configured on both layer 3 devices in the non backbone area and the backbone 28 1 4 OSPF and Router Elections The OSPF protocol provides for automatic election of Designated Router DR and Backup Designated Router BDR on network segments The DR and BDR keep track of link state updates in their area and make sure LSAs are sent to the rest of the network In most cases the default DR BDR election is fine but in some situations it must be controlled In the following figure only router A has direct connectivity with all the other routers on the network segment Routers B and C do not have
107. such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 148 DHCP Relay Configuration Example Active Information DHCP Relay g Status Remote DHCP Server 1 192 168 1 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Iv Option 82 Iv Hh 7 05 0 Apply Cancel EXAMPLE XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP 32 5 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings BS Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on the Switch See Section 7 6 on page 79 for information on how to do this Figure 149 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN BuUENEDSDDENNP Status VID Server C Relay DHCP Status Server Client IP Pool Starting Address noon Size of Client IP Pool zz IP Subnet Mask booo Default Gateway booo Primary DNS Server booo Secondary DNS Server noon Relay Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information m Option 82 Information Fi Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete 2 Serv
108. tator rtm aia bora peo rd uiian 186 FUSS PA er aaa 187 Figure 94 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct cccsisiascsnastecncccacasacacananapeienneasocadeasssennaasesaresnaneathetons 188 Figure 95 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup sssussussss 189 Figure 96 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup 2 esseeeeeeeeeees 191 Figure 97 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup sess 193 Figure 98 DHCP Snooping Database File Format 11i srt retta nr ntm te ne nid 202 Figure 99 Example Man in the middle Attack eeu sese rien hn tnn nn naa tn anna ko tna a Rana 203 Figure 100 IP Source Guar o 205 Figure 101 IF Source Guard Statie BINGING epee ecc eec dade Mtl Pree errr erent rrr Petr ree Peer err er reer rer terry 206 iuis T0Z PRCP O DOO IN Deere emer er tee eteree rt tuis eati ceree rarer cincti kon v Rr tuba vene colo qaa oM FR tie freee 207 Figure 103 DHCP Snooping COMMUNE e 210 Figure 104 DHCP Snooping Port Configure 1 cseccentiesa rt d kt cute Kk ce p b br En indt t er Ete 212 Figure TUS DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure aede ni cire Ee FERE NESe esee eb FEE HT Obr f PE GP eras p e e eb dup QUMERRRUA 213 Figure TOB ARP napetim SIUS a iss ss su ce docendo attacca E o da ca atr D RU clin 214 Figure 107 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Luise erre tnc e buna a c
109. the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscr
110. the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Address Prefix cud Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults XGS 4528F User s Guide 153 Chapter 18 Classifier 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration BS To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over a lower layer rule Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 1 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 Ci Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen
111. the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high You can specify the maximum rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports Limit Rate and Burst Interval settings have no effect on trusted ports Rate pps Specify the maximum rate 1 2048 packets per second at which the Switch receives ARP packets from each port The Switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit Burst interval seconds The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is monitored for each port For example if the Rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1 second then the Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one second interval If the burst interval is 5 seconds then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five second interval Enter the length 1 15 seconds of the burst interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation pa
112. to create a new IP interface This allows the Switch to route traffic between the RD and Sales networks Figure 20 Initial Setup Network Example IP Interface SE P w mm eee eee eee esses 1 Connect your computer to the MGMT port that is used only for management Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the MGMT port XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 0 1 the default MGMT port IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 51 for more information 3 Click Basic Setting and IP Setup eq in the navigation panel Default Gateway 00 4 Configure the related fields in the ponen ame sewe LM Default Management in band C Outof band IP Setup screen For the Sales network enter PESE i Acros 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and cdd ELI IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 0 as the subnet E m mask 5 Inthe VID field enter the ID of Apply Cancel the VLAN group to which you want this IP interface to belong NE IP Address 182 168 2 1 This is the same as the VLAN ID mE us p you configure in the Static b p VLAN screen 6 Click Add to save the settings to Add Cancel the run time memory Settings m Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Delete the run time memory are lost 1 192468 1 12 255 255 255 0 1 m when the Switch s power is turned off Delate Conca EXAMPLE
113. to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Add Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups v Pop up Blocker FAQ Close 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 44 Troubleshooting 6 Click Apply to save this setting 44 2 1 2 JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 206 Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings AG E O Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones r Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone E Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites OK Cancel Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Scripting Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the
114. 0 a0 5 b2 62 26 dynamic 11 172 21 4 99 00 0c 76 08 cf 88 dynamic 12 172 21 10 11 08 00 20 ad f6 88 dynamic 13 172 21 100 153 00 90 27 be a2 8c dynamic 14 172 21 207 247 00 0c 76 09 17 1a dynamic 15 192 168 1 1 00 a0 c5 3f 81 56 dynamic 16 182 168 1 5 00 85 a0 01 01 04 dynamic 17 192 168 1 10 00 a0 c5 5e dffg static 18 192 168 1 100 00 85 a0 01 01 00 dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 135 Management gt ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the ARP Table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address above Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Routing Table This chapter introduces the routing table 42 1 Overview The routing table contains the route information to the network s that the Switch can reach The Switch automatically updates the routing table with the RIP information received from other Ethernet devices 42 2 Viewing the Routing Table Status Use this screen to view routing table information Click Management gt Routing Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 200 Management gt Routing Table
115. 00 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File received OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec ftp The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 131 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 3701t0 bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch 38 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 38 Cluster Management Figure 194 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration Clustering Management Configuration Status Clustering Manager Active Vv Name Master VID f Apply Cancel Clustering Candidate 00 13 49 00 00 01 ES 2108 G ES 2108 G 00 13 49 00 00 02 GS 3012 GS 3012 List Password Add Cancel Refresh Index
116. 0020 India Support E mail support zyxel co jp Sales E mail zyp zyxel co jp Telephone 81 3 6847 3700 Fax 81 3 6847 3705 Web www zyxel co jp Regular Mail ZyXEL Japan 3F Office T amp U 1 10 10 Higashi Gotanda Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Kazakhstan Support http zyxel kz support Sales E mail sales zyxel kz Telephone 7 3272 590 698 Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk Ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan Malaysia Support E mail support zyxel com my Sales E mail sales zyxel com my Telephone 603 8076 9933 Fax 603 8076 9833 Web http www zyxel com my Regular Mail ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd 1 02 amp 1 03 Jalan Kenari 17F Bandar Puchong Jaya 47100 Puchong Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia North America Support E mail support zyxel com Sales E mail sales zyxel com Telephone 1 800 255 4101 1 714 632 0882 Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web www us zyxel com FTP ftp us zyxel com XGS 4528F User s Guide Appendix C Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anaheim CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway Support E mail support zyxel no Sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway Poland
117. 0741 specification Rev 1 0 for details You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP or XFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Figure 9 Transceiver Installation Example SE 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Figure 10 Installed Transceiver 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary Figure 11 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 12 Transceiver Removal Example ES XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 2 Rear Panel The following figures show the rear panels of the AC and DC power input model switches The rear panels contain A connector for the back
118. 0Base T port Green 10 1000 Mbps Amber 100 Mbps mini GBIC 1000Base T LEDs steady link state blinking transmitting receiving Operating Environment Temperature 0 C 45 C 32 F 113 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing Storage Environment Temperature 25 C 70 C 13 F 158 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 45 Product Specifications Table 141 Hardware Specifications Ground Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger Power Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger Fuse Specification 250 VAC T4A For DC version switchboard Approvals Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A Table 142 Firmware Sp ecifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address In band 192 168 1 1 Out of band Management port 192 168 0 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Administrator User Name admin Default Password 1234 Number of Login Accounts 4 management accounts configured on the Switch Configurable on the Switch Authentication via RADIUS and TACACS also available IP Routing Domain An IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port Configure an IP routing domain to allow the Switch to route traffic between different networks VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a phy
119. 1111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 149 Subnet 1 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 XGS 4528F User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 150 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 151 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 152 Subnet
120. 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Table 8 Status gt Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 1518 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame size XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics XGS 4528F User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 7 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general Switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an
121. 30 seconds 4 30 v seconds cn c2 O seconds e wo eo Y seconds m 7 30 seconds hanc cwm ume dec d cl S ode cese Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION ru Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable Control dynamic link aggregation Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowest Priority system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Table 40 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some
122. 4 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 153 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 XGS 4528F User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 153 Eight Subnets continued SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 154 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1
123. 4 1 View OSPF Area Information Table The bottom of the OSPF Configuration screen displays a summary table of all the OSPF areas you have configured Figure 124 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Summary Table Index Name 1 Example Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete 192 168 1 1 None No O Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 91 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an area Name This field displays the descriptive name of an area Area ID This field displays the area ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation that uniquely identifies an area An area ID of 0 0 0 0 indicates the backbone Authentication This field displays the authentication method used None Simple or MD5 Stub Network This field displays whether an area is a stub network Yes or not No Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 28 5 Configuring OSPF Interfaces To configure an OSPF interface first create an IP routing domain in the IP Setup screen see Section 7 6 on page 79 for more information Once you create an IP routing domain an OSPF interface entry 1s automatically created See Section 28 1 on page 231 for more information on OSPF
124. 5 29 2 Viewing the MAG Table reper date erbe edi PA dedi peda NNa Seanad pA abd pa bar Rin da aA EEA 316 Chapter 40 uL D mm 317 40 1 IP Table 107 X 317 Pliers i tite iit a gall 212 que Pea rrr Pea tre tre ttre Prete r ret trrerre rrr treet rrr trent rr rere ater 318 Chapter 41 dL m M 319 LUNEIIIID CES co M TT 219 ORE PI ROI Re acs Saar pe esse ens ace dd sak nara ei pas ue nda eee saree 319 41 2 RNA he ARP s rraian aE T EE aE 319 XGS 4528F User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 42 Ronana Doo rU RR T TURION TACTO ETUR 321 LC UIS uc RT ela ees ltt eee tidy eh a oped RO NERO RUIT IPS CETUN 321 42 2 Viewing the ROUTING Table SIRIUS iussesesscecssecucceessucuuus est botas appo d una nasasa 321 Chapter 43 Configure CHONG O A A AMa 323 20 1 Conmigo CIONO ooi ea abend aspice Dod Hooded Ww ba p da odd dc epp KR a 323 Part VI Troubleshooting amp Product Specifications 325 Chapter 44 E 0o MM 327 44 1 Problems Staring Up the SWilch aicivsctaceiaaieradeciaiaiavesinamacndenianenccagenneiaeeininiemeaanmcarnen 327 44 2 Problems Accessing tho SWIM src rare de dog tu la gia a ata es sigue e Ra aoe 327 44 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions
125. 5 on page 109 for more information on MSTP XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 56 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP Mu Status Bridge Active n Hello Time 2 seconds MAX Age 20 seconds Forwarding Delay 15 seconds Maximum hops 128 Configuration Name 001349011fbO Revision Number 0 Apply Cancel Instance Instance l Bridge Priority 32768 Add Remove VLAN Range Start End 1 eba Enabled VLAN s rererere ereer Port Active Priority Path Cost r a a 1 r 128 n 2 r 128 n 3 r 128 4 4 ri 128 n 5 r 128 n 6 ri 128 4 7 r 128 n 8 m 128 4 i 25 26 r 128 2 27 r 128 2 28 rH 128 p Add Cancel Instance VLAN Active Port Delete 0 1 4094 Delete Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 57 on page 124 Active Select this check box to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this checkbox to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration mes
126. 54 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking ssssssssesssenene emnt 170 HEIC Multig ast cul M 174 Table 56 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting sssssssssssseeee 175 Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 177 Table 58 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile 179 Table 59 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 182 Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration 184 Table 61 RADIUS ve TACACOP seisssdevisvinnicieatiestiunasitiandisinielonainaeon samedi en 188 Table 62 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup sssssss 189 Table 63 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup ccccccecsssssseseseseeeeeees 191 Table 64 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup sess 193 Table 695 Supported VOSAS e 195 Table 66 Supported Tunnel Protocol AUDI iecit rto ob GR PELLIS KR RR da Lie Ub a 196 Table 67 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ssssssssssssseeee eene 198 Table 68 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet
127. 8F User s Guide List of Tables Table 39 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting 136 Table 40 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP 137 Table 41 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x sse 144 Table 42 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication eeeesssss 145 Table 43 Advanced Application gt Port Security esssssssssssssseseesemereneenennen nennen 148 Table 44 Advanced Application gt Classifier uus ooo rao rope Eee e orate EE RII Ebo o eroe rePI iaieiiea Fe ote iaeiiai 152 Table 45 Classiier Summary Table qv T 154 Table 46 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number 2 eccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeencensecaeeeseneeeneeees 154 Tabo A7 Sommer Pre ausi ites aie at tin deve ne bobo cO HR pter o b et ra aes 155 Table 48 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule sssssssssssssssesseeenneene mener nnns 159 Table 49 Policy Summary Table 160 Table 50 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method c cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeennecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeensenaeeeeeeeeess 165 Table SLA TO FONE E o o 0 00 oot 169 Table 52 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format eeeeceeiseseeeeiienee thanh 169 E cu ESUDTM ANI EN T NC DPI E CNN REN 169 Table
128. 9 rd COMO PIE a 229 Chapter 28 SPP 231 Dies Te OVON aa 231 28 1 1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and ANCES iosuterieiinkk ree dnnnkk kk Inu AREE HH d MEER EHE dun RE RR HA 231 ZO Ae HOW OSPF o 232 28 1 3 Interteces and Virtual LINKS 15ucciod eite b bh dba t tbe haa a ada aid sa ad 232 29 14 OSPF and Routor Elec lone et eem 232 ETa ONN O PF a 233 BTC OPF Sle TEE EUN ERR 233 28 3 OSPF eoe T e M 235 ZA CONIO OSPF PESE sisaiapentesaanmbttbh dide eran ents GRO ECUBGURE EEUU ECHO KAU RUR E RES d 237 28 4 1 View OSPF Area Information Table 1 eter rre titer Eee rne ark it nk ERE I gan EkeA 238 28 5 Configuring OSPF Imeras ucssscsicicetui sec cetecu ees abuai ce caca ei ped e pe Ide e Ltda aad 238 BOUBOSPENXIBNBEEIBES xiadxdexuditio iiti unte etd ohio etel eds tediet A abe io atau 240 Chapter 29 rj e 243 XGS 4528F User s Guide Table of Contents POME OVE NION ES 243 e Nuls E a L eT NT 244 popu 5Mti re 245 poke issu AA 245 Chapter 30 Bl m 247 COONNrCI Ida so ect 247 alg MW ERIS VUES Lie lode c o area oci bod ode ac uma Eua 247 30 2 1 RUIT a iss ass RE E D TS 248 30 3 Coniguring DYMIRP e M 248 30 3 1
129. A adu pupa dU os pain pede 89 Go Statio VLAN e 89 85 1T Stait VLAN SAUS sri a 90 Toe a vege de DRS aai N 90 8 5 9 Configure a Statie VLAN cisaciicietsdcaieeaisisiiqestasaiicsaaniieedsd ptt Ea Ed 91 8 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings aussi dispar entcavn i amaai niner Fa QU Eaa Eana 92 8 0 Subnet Based VLA istis pee R EARE mea 94 6 7 Comiguring Subnet Based VLAN uscita ra ror RE RR pO S RP HS HESSE d T ep 438 95 Spb Bascg VLANE aia ncriaxesscndcut i Et ERRH eie SERO QU EPI IEEE RP Uu ba FL tU cU SE IER KEEPER dan 96 5 9 Contouring Protocol Based YLAN uuuuucasssece sinmas pet crt ado pu piadina in a aaran ii 97 8 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example 12 2 o ror I ebria oak indra Ferre eo Feste Ee Rasa das 98 8 11 POM based VLAN SEI skarin aE s v M pole Rebum adds ln eR Ed 99 8 11 1 Conmgure a Port Dased VLAN 1 oorr etri Fut bhpa Eph tb aare E PU naaa 100 Chapter 9 Stali MAC Forward Stip o ied iaa da EAR ARI Rx IRA KL REX REY TEUER RR ERR TO na FE Qa Ra TRE TS Ru MO ERA 103 NN TI NY T S E Ni UN EIN T ico 103 9 2 Configuring State MAC Forwarding 5 oeeccsesseccceresssx ce ect esen accu er tieu cu El oae FEE brad a 103 Chapter 10 iit 105 10 1 Configure a Filtering RUlS uiua ied cen DER adeta Legno rh bed spe ipn 105 Chapter 11 lec TES Prototol e 107 XGS 4528F User s Guide 13 Table of Contents Thal SIP
130. AEAT 259 plum 267 Management f 277 e a 279 PEAS CORNO saaier SEERE EEEE EENE 285 Roc e IE E A EEA eas RE A A E E ES E A PE E T 303 TO a E A A 305 Custer Management aa Sica tea mana EE EA AA TEE 309 MAG TADIG sser a aan a e aN Daa daa E O 315 NP ANS Uu 317 PEE ini eR I T a 319 nga 321 Peprei Q 0 vM EUREN NR 323 Troubleshooting amp Product Specifications cessere 325 TRUSS SGN 327 Product SDEOINOSIIOUS iustsianauasiemiri uM E Ud Pin sta eae ET MEM RU 335 Appendices and RICK cassa ski RERO ERU AR MERE an VERA ERE ENREEEY OR EKEAK SEQUI REF eua FAV MEA QR MAR 343 XGS 4528F User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This SS CUIUS uico sic vd cv FER EEER RE Fac DEFERT RE ORC RRE RH X ROV RE EE SRM SINUM hexassiayaalantulaes 3 Document C I NEU LS i cud kTaXEEGe ket RR EHE UK D AREE E CTRTUE ras OR FA RRR RR FUXR B EAK RR PORA NER IN RME TUER T R VERTES 4 Safety rli ce E S 6 Contents QUBIVIBU ios Ie Pa RYE ou TE Tu ED RAPRKTUEFGA ME OR UM GUXM EIE CIR A GRO NVe UC M D S TRIN CERO LI OU VM DU EK LM 9 Table DF COIIBBES uico fu en UD cdc phan FECE ER TE DRE pU inate LORI AIME DUE UG brat iid DH GrH d RET 11 stor ROWO qc
131. ASSTPOOVBPUQW Lansstedetiiea v bevete eh Hostia ua bet aAA NA 107 WETS E TONNOIR errira UU I TT 107 TIRZ Hou AP MOIES a ne teddgecniedadut Ce bU see ET DEDIT LEM MEE 108 TIL STE Por Sales oi aa Gass es headin e SR aa aed o Ru CURRO 108 UE Mae R IP Tt 109 TERO PUPE TP aaa a 109 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen uiu sse cce ken cr kc crt nba RE ena 112 puEeR o cL NIC iPepr M mT 113 11 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tres Protocol sisse rtt o deo a stab 114 11 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status uocat ERU eroe n Er ESTE enhn b Een iaa Lone 116 11 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol sssessssssseeeeeees TI 11 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status sss hm na oon iren 119 11 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol ssssssssssrisssrissssssesissnrrrsrirnsarisessdssnnnsssindanirera 120 11 5 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status ccresesisduccsinsencsiseuciddecrssecigusodcamsiaabiviaeniadonadennens 123 Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control e 127 12 1 Bandwidth Control CERAM saissetiae aana iian NE 127 gf NE ana PIR aa a 127 pp dg eb PE 127 Chapter 13 Broadcast Stormi Control auis iinise taces se yre pia peso van Seti rasae oe vie slap ooRiU oss pe nappe P s ep ia e De RD 129 13 T Broadcast Stenm Control SSUP 3 5 RH IoeiTuR rU SEC REDE E EE Mag AREE EIU Rb e TEM hate 129 Chapter 14 lli
132. Application gt VRRP Configuration gt VRRP Parameters see 271 Figure 155 VRBE Coniiguration SUMIATI s tossed exu e cea Eun qoe ERE ARE SUR ANN bu se Po EHU A DER UR ERRARE ERUR 272 Figure 157 VRRP Configuration Example One Virtual Router Network ssee 272 Figure 158 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch A sssesesse 273 Figure 159 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B sseesseesss 273 Figure 160 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch A iie rrr rone hd e dene nnne 273 Figure 161 VRRP Example T VRRP Status on Switeh B iudcacteneemnacE buta d snae EE ped Re 2 EH i deu etasn 273 Figure 162 VRRP Configuration Example Two Virtual Router Network seeeee 274 Figure 163 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A suuss 274 Figure 164 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B eee 274 Figure 165 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status OF SwIG Ay 42 rese oxi noa od eoe eda denas indes 275 Figure 166 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch B emen 275 Figure 167 Management ue a 279 XGS 4528F User s Guide List of Figures Figure ToS Load Factory Detail SSIBET und a pecia o co aot ad ak S Rd ES Ru a S ade 280 Figure 169 Reboot System COnMMAUON euuicuus enarrat tena tonta Fett R RR RR RR x eue ath EA FIR ERR ERR ki endet 281 Figure 170 Manag
133. Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST inst
134. CMP iv SNMP Vv Apply Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 123 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 35 10 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next You can specify a group of one or
135. CRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes ZyNOS FAN This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware including the Version date created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Switch Address Hardware Monitor Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature BOARD PHY and MAC refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Fan Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently RPM ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this
136. D Delete XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 93 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Virtual Link LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Area ID Select the area ID in an IP address format with dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Peer Router ID Enter the ID of a peer border router Authentication Note Virtual interface s must use the same authentication method within the same area Select an authentication method The choices are Same as Area None default Simple and MD5 To exchange OSPF packets with a peer border router you must make the authentication method and or password settings the same as the peer border router Select Same as Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set the related fields when necessary Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using a simple password Select MD5 to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication Key ID When you select MD5 in the Authentication field specify the identification number of the authentication you want to use Key When you select Simple in the Authenticatio
137. DHCP snooping 202 user profiles 187 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA ventilation holes 39 VID 81 87 90 91 169 number of possible VIDs 87 priority frame 87 VID VLAN Identifier 87 virtual links 240 virtual links and OSPF 232 Virtual Router status 268 Virtual Router VR 267 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP 267 VLAN 77 87 339 acceptable frame type 93 automatic registration 88 ID 87 ingress filtering 93 introduction 77 number of VLANs 90 port isolation 93 port number 91 port settings 92 port based VLAN 99 port based all connected 102 port based isolation 102 port based wizard 102 static VLAN 91 status 90 91 tagged 87 trunking 89 94 type 78 89 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 77 VLAN number 81 VLAN stacking 167 169 configuration 170 example 167 frame format 169 port roles 168 171 priority 169 VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN VLAN subnet based See subnet based VLANs 94 VRID Virtual Router ID 268 VRRP 267 advertisement interval 270 authentication 269 backup router 267 configuration example 272 Hello message 270 how it works 267 interface setup 268 master router 267 network example 267 272 parameters 270 preempt mode 270 271 priority 270 271 status 268 uplink gateway 271 uplink status 268 Virtual Router 267 Virtual Router ID 271 VRID 268 VSA 195 W warranty 354 XGS 4528F User s Guide Index note 355 web configurator 38 51
138. DVMRP Configuration Error Messages iiis eterne amt nt yn anite 249 30 4 Delault DYMRP Timer ValUos Me 250 Chapter 31 Differentiated ServieBB nsns ia aaa a 251 SETO S9 Qo a 251 21 1 1 DSCP and PersHep BelSVIGBE cscegeccsssadavulwersavtantssiaiwaasaneecnaidasnsvwbuakonnncnsssavorba esse 251 31 1 2 Diffaerv Network Example aescciekkseptbviiv tescUur o Svr PN EE sR IMAGE USE EPI PEE PEE XE iii 252 31 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing reiten rtr rhe d enn th d tinae 252 SLA Mh SONS rope 253 91 2 2 TRTOM Golor aware MOGE serais ennie na nEn an deae cepe caaayeanne 253 FS PCT AUN EMTS cT 254 34 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings a siccccccuieseiaieceteasiiocteteneiecevteneudeoettence 254 31 4 DSGP doJEBE BUZ Tp Priority STINGS saysisisssaudedesisadedPessdveauddsasseddetnninaoes i ua deed aan 256 314 1 Configuring DSCP Settings uiissssepaenqusexiko ede e eade ERE nbl End oda dee ERE id ebd add 256 Chapter 32 pl m e 259 aie 1 DAIGP Ee i e 259 ROM NURSES NERO aaa OE ST 259 22 1 2 DHCP C onangiradbon pO iuaasbccero vesci tebetue brin ert x on vem rubens pbp sv UR VER OdA 259 te DOE ANS e 260 32 3 DHCP Server Status Detail TN 260 caa PII A 261 324 1 DACP Relay Agent Informallorn xd er a e raters ow cee at Og Ex t id 261 224 2 Communng DEHOE Global Relay uenerit cede cet e ud be beiup er bea
139. FRI RAUM Mi x MM MM TERMED 147 Tru PORCOSSCUITIS BUD o idet ea addat aded ot OREGON irre RUD SEU C EROR terre ter 147 Chapter 18 ere ED cease sue Loo aa E Ea FRA CR TE EEE CEU RI XE dar eM Ehe eta bu EI aac eU A i eda add 151 pU WE Me CG 20 4 gc Ac anna sen am neee 151 18 2 Copiiguring the Classihef ee 151 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration cccceceeeeenecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeennsnaeeeeeeeees 154 Uu CEE ca EXAMP Pee 155 Chapter 19 Policy RUIG T A A X AO V G A 157 12 7 Policy FSS UBI ausente eri ast aos shal Baas asc aucun secs lad oo tpe aed en tud Ea dus 157 bs aL Lcd aet 157 19 1 7 DSCP and Per Hop BENAWIOl iuesccessks euis sexe pi tute dinine tiae ban aianei aeei 157 15 2 onmaumbg Policy NS as eedac rund ded EMI ed EE Cina bua Kebab e ERU M oak bh el bx Fett QUU ik ted 158 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration scisecsinuiessiendeenteniaieset madeeseeiwaiesitinaeaieuad 160 19 4 EO EXSIIDIS iurc eas EQUES Che REG Reg e A ci ctr tta eR ua Ute 160 Chapter 20 Guerino o po eM 163 NER Id apUEes c A 163 20 11 Sirictiy PRON A X cagaryeuns 163 20 1 2 Weighted Fair QUeuing 12 55 acer Dep od Eddie Eod ad e Re ken ta ad nd ipe 163 20 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 1 comete o tino tient rnb atre n RERDHUR 164 Een mper ipo
140. Hostname XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 102 IP Application gt DHCP Server Status Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION Start IP Address This field displays the starting IP address of the IP address pool configured for this DHCP server instance End IP Address This field displays the last IP address of the IP address pool configured for this DHCP server instance Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask value sent to clients from this DHCP server instance Default Gateway This field displays the default gateway value sent to clients from this DHCP server instance Primary DNS This field displays the primary DNS server value sent to clients from this DHCP Server server instance Secondary DNS This field displays the secondary DNS server value sent to clients from this DHCP Server server instance Address Leases This section displays information about the IP addresses this DHCP server issued to clients Index This field displays a sequential number for each DHCP request handled by the Switch IP Address This is the IP address issued to a DHCP client Timer This field displays the time remaining before the DHCP client has to renew its IP address Hardware This field displays the MAC address of the DHCP client Address It may also display SELF OCCUPIED ADDRESS if the IP address cannot be used for DHCP beca
141. ION Active Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port number to be included in this protocol based VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 8 on page 87 for more details on setting up VLANs Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN Ethernet type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to OxO5ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these num
142. Index Network Version 1 172 23 37 209 24 None 2 192 168 1 1 24 None Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 IP Application gt IGMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable IGMP on the Switch Note You cannot enable both IGMP snooping and IGMP at the same time Refer to Section 22 4 on page 177 for more information on IGMP snooping Unknown Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Multicast Unknown multicast frames are addressed to multicast groups for which the Switch has Frame not recorded any group members Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Index This field displays an index number of an entry Network This field displays the IP domain configured on the Switch Refer to Section 7 6 on page 79 for more information on configuring IP domains Version Select an IGMP version from the drop down list box The choices are IGMP v1 IGMP v2 IGMP v3 and None Generally if you want to enable IGMP on the Switch you should choose IGMP v3 as it is compatible with older versions Choose an earlier version of IGMP IGMP v2 or IGMP v1 if the multicast hosts on your network can not recognize IGMP version 3 or version 2 Query messages Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link
143. LAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 150 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs E DHCP 172 23 10 100 Wit For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 151 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example gt VLAN Sett Status VID 2 C DHCP Status MM Relay Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 0 0 0 0 Size of Client IP Pool EIC IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server 1 0 0 1 Relay Remote DHCP Server 1 1722310100 Remote DHCP Server 2 noon Remote DHCP Server 3 booo Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information O Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete Relay 192 168 1 100 r Delete Cancel I XGS 4528F User s Guide VRRP This chapter shows you how to configure and monitor the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP on the Switch 33 1 VRRP Overview Each host on a network is configured to send packets to a statically configured default gateway this Switch The default gateway can become a single point of failure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP defined in RFC 2338 allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host
144. MP v1 RFC 1155 SMI RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1213 SNMP MIB II RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1723 RIP 2 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1757 RMON RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2131 RFC 2132 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP RFC 2138 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2139 RADIUS Accounting RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2338 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP RFC 2698 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM RFC 2865 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2674 P BRIDGE MIB Q BRIDGE MIB RFC 3046 DHCP Relay RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 3 RFC 3414 User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v3 RFC 3580 RADIUS Tunnel Protocol Attribute IEEE 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 1D MAC Bridges IEEE 802 1p Traffic Types Packet Priority IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 3 Packet Format IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 45 Product Specifications Table 144 Standards Supported continued STANDA
145. MacAddr Name Model Remove 1 00 13 48 aefb 7a ES 2024PWR ES 2024PWR O The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 132 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done co
146. Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 114 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control 35 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them 35 3 2 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and perfo
147. NO 1 Name Link Down Status STOP LACP Disabled TxPkts 0 RxPkts 0 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 0 Rx KBs s 0 0 Up Time 0 00 00 TX Packet TX Packets 0 Multicast 0 Broadcast 0 Pause 0 Tagged 0 RX Packet RX Packets 0 Multicast 0 Broadcast 0 Pause 0 Control 0 TX Collision Single 0 Multiple 0 Excessive 0 Late 0 Error Packet RX CRC 0 Length 0 Runt 0 Distribution 64 0 65 to 127 0 128 to 255 0 256 to 511 0 12 to 1023 0 1024 to 1518 0 Giant 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Status gt Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbpsl 1000M for 1000 Mbps and 10G for 10 Gbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 3 on page 108 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this
148. P Inspection VLAN Status Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Status XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 107 ARP Inspection VLAN Status C OWS Status Enabled VLAN Show VLAN range C Selected VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Received Request Reply Forwarded Dropped The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section below Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below Then enter the lowest VLAN ID Start VID and the highest VLAN ID End VID you want to look at Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Reply This field displays the total number of ARP
149. P packets but will not accept any RIP packets received None the Switch will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Switch sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M send the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting 27 2 Configuring RIP Click IP Application gt RIP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown You cannot manually configure a new entry Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 7 6 on page 79 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 27 RIP Figure 118 IP Application gt RIP Active Index 1 xu C Network Direction Version 192 168 1 1 24 None es RIP 1 gt Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 IP Application gt RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable RIP on the Switch Index This field displays the index number of an IP interface Network This field displays the IP interface configured on the Switch Ref
150. PF status and configure OSPF settings IGMP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IGMP settings DVMRP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol settings DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure marking rules and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings VRRP This link takes you to screens where you can configure redundant virtual router for your network Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and can test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management Management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address and VLAN ID of a device attach to a port You can also view what kind of device it is IP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IP addresses and VLAN ID of a device attached to
151. Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight the number you configure in the Weight field when there is traffic congestion WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights By default the weight for QO is 1 for Q1 is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on The weights range from 1 to 15 and the actual guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows 2 Weight 1 x 10 KB Ifthe weight setting is 5 the actual quantum guaranteed to the associated queue would be as follows 24 x 10KB 320 KB XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 20 Queuing Method 20 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixe
152. R Ble BIBIRIBB e e b blBlBlBlb gt gt gt gt BlblblBlb s gt gt gt e BlblBlblb gt blblblElb gt gt gt gt RIBIBIBIB gt gt gt BIRIBIBIBI blblblblb gt gt gt gt gt blblblblb gt gt BIRIBIRIBI gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt gt blblblblb o gt gt BIBIBIBIB amp blblb E E gt gt e b b blb b o e BIBIBIRIB o iv 12113 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 VME Ww 10 11 lv Vv Vv 10 11 9 Vv lv 9 Iv iv 8 Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv bbbbbxblblblblbl5s gt e gt e DRRR gt gt e e ele b bb e gt BIBIBIBB gt 5 e MADE gt e 5 e 5 blo abeere x blblblblbls gt e RERE gt e e e o blo aeee e gt BIBIBIBB gt 2 5 e KARDE e e e e 5 lo eee e e BREER gt gt e e RIBIRIRIB gt gt gt gt o B e e e e e eje 28 z s8 Six ja 9S 5 e S RIRSISIRISISIS A o 8 11 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Chapter 8 VLAN XGS 4528F User s Guide Apply Cancel The following screen shows users on a port based port isolated VLAN configuration Chapter 8 VLAN Figure 42 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation TES Setting Wizard Port isolation x s De ee Ce ee Se Doce coco ccc CEEILEEL IC EST a ee ee ey a S Beco LIEILILILI Loo oR LC Samm m m ee ccc c EIS e DODDO cHe
153. RD DESCRIPTION IEEE 802 3ah Ethernet OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance IEEE 802 3x Flow Control IEEE 802 3z 1000BASE X For optical fiber link 1000BASE SX LX XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 45 Product Specifications XGS 4528F User s Guide PART VII Appendices and Index IP Addresses and Subnetting 345 Legal Information 353 Customer Support 357 Index 363 IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up
154. RSTP MSTP Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Setting Link Aggregation Control Protocol Port Authentication 802 1x MAC Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast Status Multicast Setting IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Group Configuration Authentication and Accounting RADIUS Server Setup TACACS Server Setup Auth and Acct Setup IP Source Guard IP Source Guard Static Binding DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Configure DHCP Snooping Port Configure DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure ARP Inspection Status ARP Inspection VLAN Status ARP Inspection Log Status ARP Inspection Configure ARP Inspection Port Configure ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Loop Guard BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT System Info VLAN Status Static Routing Maintenance General Setup VLAN Port Setting RIP Firmware Upgrade OSPF Status OSPF Configuration OSPF Interface OSPF Virtual Link IGMP DVMRP DiffServ 2 Rate 3 Color Marker DSCP Setting DHCP Status DHCP Relay VLAN Setting VRRP Status VRRP Configuration Restore Configuration Backup Configuration Access Control SNMP Trap Group Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Diagnostic Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Cluster Management Status Configuration MAC Table IP Tabl
155. Reply packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted 24 6 2 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status XGS 4528F User s Guide 215 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 108 ARP Inspection Log Status tatus OFA ee Clearing log status table Total number of logs 0 Index Port VID Sender Mac Sender IP Status Apply Num Pkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 ARP Inspection Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status table Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of d
156. STOP B Down STOP i Down STOP 8 Down STOP 8 Down STOP 10 Down STOP 11 Down STOP 12 100M iF Copper FORWARDING 13 Down STOP 14 Down STOP 15 Down STOP 18 Down STOP 1T Down STOP 18 Down STOP 18 Down STOP 20 Down STOP An 5 pa 1 Clear Counter RxPkts EXC OLIO LOO CK e CLERO CHO UE LENS Errors eo cc 0O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o0 o0 Tx KB s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rx KB s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 594 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Up Time 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 03 54 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 XGS 4528F User s Guide 67 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 24 on page 69 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting gt Port Setup screen Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10 Mbps 100M for 100 Mbps 1000M for 1000 Mbps and 10G for 10 Gbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo port
157. STP as defined in the following standards e IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol JEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 11 1 STP RSTP Overview R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge and then the root bridge notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding BES In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 11 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Path cost is the cost of transmitti
158. Setup OEE aD System Name XGS 4528F Location Contact Person s Name Use Time Server when Bootup None Time Server IP Address 0 0 0 i n 47 UTC Current Date o1 E o1 New Date yyyy mm dd 970 T J bi Time Zone UTC buf Daylight Saving Time 1 Current Time A New Time hh mm ss oh b eo o Start Date of January at 0 00 End Date First Sunday Y or January at 10 00 It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Type a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Location Type the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Contact Person s Name Type the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Use Time Server when Bootup Type the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them
159. Stacking Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol bhased VLAN Port based VLAN MAC Authentication Two rate three color marker Ethernet OAM Loop Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping Apply Cancel Advanced Application EIBEBUBEELBERGSI ChE BEELUEEFEDIBEEEELUEEFEULEELTI XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 43 Configure Clone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 137 Management gt Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are copied Destination Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports Port which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports e 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Setting Select which port settings configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings configured in the Advanced Application menus should Application be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch
160. Support E mail support ua zyxel com Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 Fax 380 44 494 49 32 Web www ua zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine United Kingdom Support E mail support zyxel co uk Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk Telephone 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only Fax 44 1344 303034 Web www zyxel co uk FTP ftp zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK XGS 4528F User s Guide Appendix C Customer Support XGS 4528F User s Guide Index Numerics 802 1P priority 83 A access control limitations 285 login account 293 remote management 300 service port 299 SNMP 286 accounting setup 192 address learning MAC 95 97 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 319 323 324 administrator password 294 age 122 aggregator ID 135 136 aging time 78 allowing pop up windows 328 alternative subnet mask notation 347 applications bridging 35 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 37 switched workgroup 36 Area Border Router ABR 231 area ID and OSPF 237 ARP how it works 319 viewing 319 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 319 ARP inspection 201 203 and MAC filter 204 configuring 204 syslog messages 204 trusted ports 204 AS Boundary Router 231 authentication 237 and OSPF 237 and RADIUS 188 setup 192 authorization privilege levels 194 Index au
161. Switch Figure 1 Bridging Application Sy o D nm ss 55 5555555 1 1 2 High Performance Switching Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two geographically dispersed networks that need high bandwidth In the following example a company uses the optional 10 Gigabit uplink modules to connect the headquarters to a branch office network Within the headquarters network a company can use trunking to group several physical ports into one logical higher capacity link Trunking can be used if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Figure 2 High Performance Switching 10 Gbps S r VARI N Branch 4 eee e 8 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 1 1 3 Gigabit Ethernet to the Desktop The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks which demand high bandwidth for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers and servers directly to the Switch s port or connect other switches to the Switch Use the optional 10 Gigabit uplink module to provide high speed access to a data server and the Internet The uplink module supports a fiber optic connection which alleviates the distance limitations of copper cabling In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server and access the Internet To expand the network simply add more networking
162. Switch is the root Switch Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root Switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the MST instance XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol XGS 4528F User s Guide Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen 12 1 Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port 12 1 1 CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop ES The CIR should be less than the PIR LES The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth 12 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as sh
163. Table 62 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Del
164. Table 69 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP Calling Station Id v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS Port Type v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session ld v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Input Octets v v Acct Output Octets v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Input Packets v v Acct Output Packets v v Acct Terminate Cause v Acct Input Gigawords v v Acct Output Gigawords v v XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting XGS 4528F User s Guide IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network 24 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID IP address Port number When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features Static bindings Use
165. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands See Section 44 7 on page 336 for local authentication The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 64 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct
166. User Information Index Username Security Level Authentication Privacy 1 admin noauth MDs DES j Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 120 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 Get Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Set Community Enter the Set Community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of u
167. XGS 4528F Intelligent Layer 3 Switch User s Guide Version 3 80 8 2007 Edition 1 DEFAULT LOGIN IP Address Mhttp 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Password 1234 ZyXEL www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the Switch using the web configurator or via commands You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide contains information on setting up your hardware Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information BS It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the Switch Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters zyxel com tw XGS 4528F User s Guide 3 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and note
168. a port You can also view what kind of device it is ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address IP address resolution table Routing Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the routing table Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to an other port s XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to display the next screen Figure 17 Change Administrator Login Password Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm Access Control 1 2 AMEN NENNEN ENSEM NENNEN 4 Apply Cancel 4 4 Saving Your Configuration BS When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even i
169. ack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackets 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 3 Repeat steps and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the Switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack Figure 7 Mounting the Switch on a Rack Tu lt a E D s D Bin D E DL zt SS A e P ip u Oo R o EH D on D D D D D E Li D a T1 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the MS flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack XGS 4528F User s G
170. ag defined by the Service Provider s SP VLAN ID VID Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 21 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 51 VLAN Tag Format Type Priority VID Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9 100 TPID Tag Protocol Identifier is the customer IEEE 802 1Q tag If the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port then the Switch adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure Ifthe VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port then the Switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the Switch If an incoming frame s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the Switch then the Switch will not add the tag Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the custom
171. age 188 as external authentication authorization and accounting servers Figure 93 AAA Server a Client AAA Server 23 1 1 Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 35 on page 285 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting 23 1 2 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS Table 61 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client the authentication Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 23 2 Authentication and Accounting Screens To enable authentication accounting or both on the Switch First configure your authentication server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priori
172. al destination Routing is Address always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Mask Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Address Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide 227 Chapter 26 Static Route Table 83 IP Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaul
173. ally by an administrator dhcp snooping This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 24 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static binding the new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 101 IP Source Guard Static Binding ONSET EEE NEN IPSG MAC Address IP Address VLAN Port i Any Add Cancel Clear Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 IP Source Guard Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in t
174. amel en 61 5 1 2 Configuring DHCP Server SunOS sicccsaccccieecesieke eter inarin vc ddr bred E pct rie pepe d 62 cl Lee Rum M rr 63 SNR oN ud bem T 64 M BIS DBli nde 65 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics eese 67 SNNT E IU T IUE TT 67 6 2 Port Status SUMMA MM 67 aT SANE FODOS aiin E 68 Chapter 7 Basie lj 73 A EROSION errr ee eee te di ivi etant muti n ree errr erie teeter errr E 73 perl uL m 73 12 XGS 4528F User s Guide Table of Contents plc CRI UD c 75 FEES ONT VLAN RICE 77 7 9 Switeh Setup Sore srsti oedran a ieceaobiss poni eaa NA Ves vp EAr aAA E 77 xa eo d rc TS 79 RE ME yr e E 79 pd Ec T t 81 Part Ill Advanced SOL eeexxxxdcined bbikupa ak CUR Nn MANN UEcu eU Y pix MENU EUS rkb t EPI UE 85 Chapter 8 VEAN a 87 8 1 Iniroduction to IEEE BOZ TO Tagged VLANS quoaeuieoeensnasdd ne dde nnda icd rd 87 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frannie eee rine pra Rea RH PEUT eR E PEERI ERA 87 8 2 TES ario VLAN RSgISINANON M 88 GUN UNE cl Tr 88 CIMACIT M tr pry Eerie N 88 Bron VLAN TONN cu crure d ee e anne aaah ae en eres ER P eke end aa rasa aan 89 Ba Select the VLAN Type tas fetesisti asin dancin pun bitu bu ed arian e A BIER M
175. ance Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance Enabled VLAN s This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 24 on page 108 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile
176. and alone layer 3 Gigabit Ethernet GbE switch with two 12 Gigabit stacking ports as well as support for an optional 2 port 10 Gigabit uplink module By integrating router functions the Switch performs wire speed layer 3 routing in addition to layer 2 switching The XGS 4528F comes with 24 GbE dual personality interfaces A dual personality interface includes one Gigabit port and one slot for a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module with one port active at a time There are two XGS 4528F models The XGS 4528F DC model requires DC power supply input of 36 VDC to 72 VDC 1 5 A Max no tolerance The XGS 4528F AC model requires 100 VAC to 240 VAC 0 8 A power With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management See Chapter 45 on page 335 for a full list of software features available on the Switch 1 1 1 Bridging Example In this example the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using the optional 10 Gigabit uplink module on the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide 35 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your
177. and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A Figure 45 MRSTP Network Example To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree BS Each port can belong to one STP tree only 11 1 5 Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backwards compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region 11 1 5 1 MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANS are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link Figure 46 STP RSTP Network Exampl
178. and the bindings from previous updates Each binding consists of 72 bytes a space and another checksum that is used to validate the binding when it is read If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the file that binding and all others after it are ignored XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 1 1 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard This provides the DHCP server more information about the source of the requests The Switch can add the following information Slot ID 1 byte port ID 1 byte and source VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames See Chapter 32 on page 259 for more information about DHCP relay option 82 When the DHCP server responds the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field before forwarding the response to the original source You can configure this setting for each source VLAN This setting is independent of the DHCP relay settings Chapter 32 on page 259 24 1 1 4 Configuring DHCP Snooping Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch 1 Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch 2 Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and configure DHCP relay option 82 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of DHCP
179. annot enable both TRTCM and Bandwidth Control at the same time Figure 142 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker Port 1 2 a Active LI FI EID CI Eroen CD Rates Color Marker MEM Active Lr Mode S man DSCP Commit Rate Peak Rate green yellow red Kbps Kbps H Kbps 1 Kbps 0 0 d 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 0 0 0 H Kops 1 kbps 0 0 2 H ios 1 kbps 0 0 E i Kbps 1 Kbps O 0 1 Kbps 1 kbps 0 0 F Kbps 1 Kbps O 0 ee m m n c Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate TRTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker on the Switch The Switch evaluates and marks the packets based on the TRTCM settings Note You must also activate DiffServ on the Switch and the individual ports for the Switch to drop red high loss priority colored packets Mode Select color blind to have the Switch treat all incoming packets as uncolored All incoming packets are evaluated against the CIR and PIR Select color aware to treat the packets as marked by some preceding entity Incoming packets are evaluated based on their existing color Incoming packets that are not marked proceed through the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this
180. ant to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 8 5 4 Con
181. apter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen Figure 52 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP EELEE Status Active E Bridge Priority 32768 Hello Time b Seconds MAX Age bo Seconds Port 25 26 Forwarding Delay hs Seconds amp ii Active Priority Path Cost nininmude gimin S88 f co ATT Er N eo i Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 53 on page 116 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP Note You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP roo
182. assword authentication Select MD5 and set the Key ID and Key fields to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication Key ID When you select MD5 in the Authentication field specify the identification number of the authentication you want to use long Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password eight character long Characters after the eighth character will be ignored When you select MD5 in the Authentication field enter a password 16 character and 65535 Cost The interface cost is used for calculating the routing table Enter a number between 0 The default interface cost is 15 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF Table 92 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority The priority you assign to the interface is used in router elections to decide which router is going to be the Designated Router DR or the Backup Designated Router BDR You can assign a number between 0 and 255 A priority of O means that the router will not participate in router elections Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel
183. at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products XGS 4528F User s Guide 355 Appendix B Legal Information XGS 4528F User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Required Information 66499 Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it is the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone call Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Support E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 Web www zyxel com www europe zyxel com FTP ftp zyxel com ftp europe zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Costa Rica Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 Fax 506 2015098 Web www zyxel co cr FTP ftp zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Rica Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 Fax 420 241 091 359 Web www zyxel cz XGS 4528F User s Guide 357 Appendix C Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ces
184. ation identification number To set the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide 257 Chapter 31 Differentiated Services XGS 4528F User s Guide DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 32 1 DHCP Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a DHCP server or a DHCP relay agent When configured as a server the Switch provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you configure the Switch as a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a DHCP server or relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually 32 1 1 DHCP Modes The Switch can be configured as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent If you configure the Switch as a DHCP server it will maintain the pool
185. ay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup Screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP Table 104 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 32 4 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLANI and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 147 Global DHCP Relay Network Example Tas DHCP Server icd 192 168 1 100 N Internet VLAN2 1 LI LI 1 LI LI LI LI LI LI L 4 LI 1 Lj Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information
186. before it gives up Abort timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database after the current bindings change This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the DHCP snooping database Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping database none The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database read The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database write The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer in seconds the Switch tries to complete the current update before it gives up It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP snooping database right now Abort timer expiry This field displays when in seconds the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping database again It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the last update This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database successfully Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch
187. before sending are lost when the Switch s power is turned off ing Port VID Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID 1 Click Advanced Applications and VLAN in the navigation panel Then click the VLAN Port Setting link Enter 2 in the PVID field for port 1 and click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off LL 5 Mie Nas LI v VLAN2 3 sees H 1 1 1 1 1 1 E3 E3 M Se 1 1 1 a umummmmmmm E VLAN Fort Setting Subnet Based Vlan Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP n Port isolation Lr Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking All n i n 2 m All r 3 n 1 O 4 n i O 5 rH 1 r 6 Dn ho n r Ip n XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 1 5 Enabling RIP To exchange routing information with other routing devices across different routing domains enable RIP Routing Information Protocol in the RIP screen 1 Click IP App
188. bers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Ethernet type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 4 and 8 Follow these steps using the screen below 1 Activate this protocol based VLAN a kf WS N Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name Type IP VLAN Select the protocol Leave the default value IP Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 6 Leave the priority set to 0 and click Add Figure 40 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example OLED Active iv Port 1 Name IP VLAN IP X Ethernet type C Others Hex VID 5 Priority 0 gt Add Ca
189. bound to any physical ports Since each IP address on the Switch must be in a separate subnet the configured IP address is also known as IP interface or routing domain In addition this allows routing between subnets based on the IP address without additional routers You can configure multiple routing domains on the same VLAN as long as the IP address ranges for the domains do not overlap To change the IP address of the Switch in a routing domain simply add a new routing domain entry with a different IP address in the same subnet XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 28 Basic Setting gt IP Setup NUI NEN Default Gateway Domain Name Server Default Management Management IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Interface IP Address IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 in band Outoftband 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VID Index IP Address 1 192 168 1 12 ro Add Cancel IP Subnet Mask VID 255 255 255 0 1 rH Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Type the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 1 254 Domain Name DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP Server address and vice versa Ent
190. c ORS EE VLAN Status Log Status Configure IPSG Total number of filters 0 Index MAC Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 ARP Inspection Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number of filters This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table IP The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP address were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Delete Click this to remove the selected entries Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 24 6 1 AR
191. c Routing Access Control General Setup Static MAC DiffServ Diagnostic Switch Setup Forwarding DHCP Syslog IP Setup Filtering MAC Table Port Setup Spanning Tree ARP Table Protocol Configure Clone Bandwidth Control Port Status Broadcast Storm Save Save Status A Logout B Help ES 2024PWRIES 2024PWR Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Queuing Method Multicast Auth and Acct IP Source Guard Loop Guard XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 38 Cluster Management 38 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 193 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch C gt ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 58 46 1970 User 192 168 0 1 none admin 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp 1s 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W Ww wW 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras rw rw rw 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config w w wWw 1 owner group O Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 rw rw rw 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File sent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp put 3701t0 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 2
192. ch examines a received packet and learns the port from which this source IP address came 2 TheSwitch checks to see if the packet s destination IP address matches a source IP address already learned in the IP Table fthe Switch has already learned the port for this IP address then it forwards the packet to that port fthe Switch has not already learned the port for this IP address then the packet is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion Ifthe Switch has already learned the port for this IP address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the packet Figure 197 IP Table Flowchart Is destination IP address in the IP Table Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to packet outgoing port XGS 4528F User s Guide 317 Chapter 40 IP Table 40 2 Viewing the IP Table Click Management gt IP Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 198 Management gt IP Table Sort by Index 1 2 3 OIE CD P VID Port IP Address VID Port Type 192 168 1 5 4 6 dynamic 192 168 1 10 0 CPU static 192 168 1 255 0 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 134 Management gt IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that bu
193. cond configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding See Section 11 1 3 on page 108 for information on port states Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Changed Times Time Since Last This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Change 11 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP click MRSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on MRSTP Figure 54 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP
194. configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this Syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide 307 Chapter 37 Syslog XGS 4528F User s Guide Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 38 1 Clustering Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 129 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster members 24 Cluster Member Models Cluster member models must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The cluster manager is the Switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members Cluster members
195. criber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management IP Multicast With IP multicast the Switch delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody In addition the Switch can send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware by untagging removing the VLAN tags IP multicast packets RIP RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information with other routers OSPF OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link state protocol designed to distribute routing information within an autonomous system AS An autonomous system is a collection of networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF is best suited for large networks DVMRP DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a protocol used for routing multicast data within an autonomous system AS DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol with IP Multicast support and the IGMP protocol VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP defined in RFC 2338 allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always available STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your networ
196. cross the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies XGS 4528F User s Guide 251 Chapter 31 Differentiated Services 31 1 2 DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Figure 138 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different traffic flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to the traffic flows For example one traffic policy would be to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network Figure 138 DiffServ Network P Platinum G Gold IB S Silver B B Bronze 31 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exce
197. curity requirements If VLAN members need to communicate directly with each other then select All Connected Select Port Isolated if you want to restrict users from communicating directly Click Apply to from the navigation panel to display the following screen Select either All Connected or Port save your settings Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN The following screen shows users on a port based all connected VLAN configuration Figure 41 2 Doo o0ov eoenroooZztnunznanzzzzRRauHR amp RHmmziasuask EDENE gt gt gt gt RESET no o TR e gt e ee eB e gt gt gt e BIRR B e e e e eke bb 2 2 gt BIRR RB e gt gt e e REEE e e e e epe B bbbbbiblblblb s e e e blblblblb e e epe Bxbbbbiblblblbls gt e e DEERE e 5 5 eke Bn gt BERDEL gt gt e e HALDE e e e epe EIEIEJEJE S gt gt e HODEN gt gt o DOEDE s DEBERE gt gt gt e 513 3 SBIBIDIDII BIBEERE 2 bb E ONSE lv Vv Iv BlblblBlb gt gt gt e blblblBlblo gt gt gt gt b blblblblo BIBIEE gt gt gt e blbjb Blb gt gt blblblBlbl gt BIRIRIRIR gt gt gt gt blblb b b gt gt gt e BIBJBJBJE gt e gt gt gt BRRR e e ee gt DERRE e 555b be gt DP gt BIRIB Rb gt e e e DORRE e e bl b xbbbblblblblbls bliblblblbl e ek gt e ee e DERDE e gt e e blblblblb e e b bbe gt e BIR
198. d amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied 20 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 78 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method kE Queuing Method NN Weight Hybrid SPQ Port Method x Lowest Queue spa 1 cwo ff Pp B M b b Fk p None x C WRR spa 2 C wra f 2 s 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR SPQ 3 C WFO 1 2 B 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR SPQ s cw ff PB B k b b FP k None gt C WRR spa 5 C wra f 2 s 4 5 6 Hn 8 None C WRR SPQ 6 C wra 1 2 s 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR spa r cwo ff PR b hM b b FP b None Apply Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 20 Queuing Method The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This label shows the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to al
199. d line interface CLI via the console port XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 2 1 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel To connect the power to the Switch insert the female end of power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to a power outlet Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans The Switch s AC unit requires a power supply of 100 240 VAC 0 8 A The Switch s DC version requires a power supply of 48 VDC to 60 VDC 2 3 A max no tolerance 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector The Switch supports external backup power supply BPS The Switch constantly monitors the status of the internal power supply The backup power supply automatically provides power to the Switch in the event of a power failure Once the Switch receives power from the backup power supply it will not automatically switch back to using the internal power supply even when the power is resumed 3 2 3 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the RS 232 console cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COM1 COM2 or other COM port of y
200. data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 178 SSH Communication Example Internet wr SEE SSH Server SSH Client 35 5 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 179 How SSH Works Internet n Y E Sa 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control 2 Encryption Method Once the identification 1s verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 35 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your Switch supports SSH version 2 us
201. de Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 34 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately XGS 4528F User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch 35 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different usernames and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 113 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to nine One session Up to five accounts No limit sessions A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See Section 44 12 2 on page 341 for more information on disabling multi login 35 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management gt Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 173 Management gt Access Control c ORE SNMP Logins
202. discard the out of profile traffic Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field Select Set Out Drop Precedence to mark out of profile traffic and drop it when network is congested Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table Index Active Name Classifier s Delete 1 Yes Test Example O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Policy Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This fie
203. dnessui E pude Y bbixE UP Qua aE E Aa EUER REO DE RARE OSEE pa iL E EAA KE 336 Table 143 Switching Speclfigalions sisisi aiaa beet dd duit d duy vada dest d uud dada deu cip L Rudd 339 Tabo T44 Standards Supported no rors gars D tere o aeo e e Foe o d oe o p Hie 340 Table 145 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example sssssssseeee 346 B T6 Subnet c 347 Table 147 Maximum Host NUMDETS 1 iir cect rari cera th kk re ca Rb a ina anina eaea had dad tha EIU E kd 347 Table 148 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation iioi errie ene krr ein IEFErFE Er ee eEER Tere rrrk p Henrik ks adeo ea Eu NERA MEE RUN 347 Ur abest d ee TT 349 Tb USM E ata aac eco inna elt omaia econ gh cedo a cap Dom Coppe Taf c undaunted t Ede 350 TABS 157 SUBSE 350 TOS Ve 1 350 TET EUU 2p i eR Lecce 350 Table 154 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning eeeeeieeeseeeseieees essei eite eene nna 351 Table 155 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning seeeeee enm een 351 32 XGS 4528F User s Guide PART Introduction Getting to Know Your Switch 35 Hardware Installation and Connection 39 Hardware Overview 43 Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch 1 1 Introduction Your Switch is a st
204. dress field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 173 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete All or Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 22 8 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 89 MVR Configuration Example VLAN Multicast VID 200 News 224158 2241450 Um ON cm S
205. e With MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANS travel on different paths The following figure shows the network example using MSTP XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 47 MSTP Network Example 11 1 5 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision level as the unique number for the MST region VLAN to MST Instance mapping 11 1 5 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances XGS 4528F User s Guide 111 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Fig
206. e ARP Table Routing Table Status Configure Clone XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 6 Navigat ion Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information and time settings for the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning IGMP snooping GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server and set up to 64 IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure speed flow control and priority settings for individual Switch ports Advanced Applica tion VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu You can also configure a protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a Forwarding port These static MAC addre
207. e 1 2 sca enirn tan ck ei caca t a ect Rid i 323 igure 202 Eeecledri r M M 328 Figure 200 Wiehe CONONS vissdicsadicitexerg cte ipti pa ag ari dtm nae elon naan 329 Peele A mene i5ei qm 330 Figure 205 Pop up Blocker S Cin MM 330 Foure 206 CITT CNIS EMT TT 331 Figure 207 Security Setlings Java Seiipling serercnsrkunensnnakii nn 332 Figure 209 CUMS SOIDDUS Java quscosidast G mad en Mice p DU GG A dq Lond dote Duci seed on ut mee 332 P raa Java UN meaai 333 Figure 210 Network Number and Host ID ccccccsscsiesicecasstensncesisansacasssanseecaavteuseaaaeyeandaiertuseeceurssammenguivence 346 XGS 4528F User s Guide List of Figures Figure 211 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting Figure 212 Subnetting Example After Subnetting XGS 4528F User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables Tape 1 Panel Comec ion 05 het tlbi n a eto a aon b i ideas ane eal ewe i 43 Dis xw u ub amp eni r cl TU MN EY 46 js CED S oat rr M 47 Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeseeseseensaneaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 53 Table 5 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details esssssssssssseeeeeeee nenne 55 Tale 6 Navigation Panel LINKS et 56 Es Ec LUE UN TN I T NN M E 68 Table 9 Status c Port Detalls coat oppo n a RUN PIANA BARI TERRE ERESN XR MER pU DI ER RE RERERRERMAAERI I URUR col
208. eated statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes for the TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes for the TCI Tag Control Information starting after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and the value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible number of VLAN configurations is 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forwa
209. econds Log interval Type how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 7 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on each untrusted port To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port Figure 110 ARP Inspection Port Configure C ORS Port Configure J Configure Limit Port Trusted State 8 Untrusted 15 pma Apply Cancel Rate pps Burst interval seconds XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 ARP Inspection Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port
210. ection OyYernvioW ie Ded ia idem pe Har pem Dae re t end 203 zo c IP DOGS Saab s parer den Roda edit E eto Gaining Ghent 205 24 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding 22er tectus ioo br tuns t au pr enu aiia bp nee eiae EER 205 prse oi c 207 219 DACP Snbpgpno C ont SE ccce it tatu demie i cse t EpEr Ie e ordo e upper vbt Oa e rd pedet UP ep RARE 210 XGS 4528F User s Guide Table of Contents 24 50 DACP Shooping PO CMU uuusssosceccesi ertt tin ctia aa gx UO E ER HR LSU Rat iR 211 24 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN CODQUEG eiuucs cepa ctu tnnt Ctt Ek E RR vbi dn nett d EE vance 213 24 6 ARP inspection Me ernan ARAE Ne ESAE E OENE eE 214 246 TARP Inspection VLAN SAUS 5c e to ira er ea a m a akt a 214 24 6 2 ARP inspection Log SI s ceucauimtesiitsautibeissi tete ensi tenu venei ii an tr RP EV GIU N 215 24 7 ARP inspection CONNQUiG scsi E 217 24 7 1 ARP inspection Port Configure ccs casa destro tr sitne Lite E tn eed ka tlt it 218 24 7 2 ARP inspection VLAN Configure duusssesetiroNs pe EA ED ME ER Pe ERE SP e LH ED Mer ER Dor Ud adde 219 Chapter 25 DOSS e mA 221 25 t Loop Guard OVEVIEW ne a RAAE E 221 Bad Loop Guard i M E 223 Part W IP AB COIN oiio 225 Chapter 26 Stale ROMO c a AE ES 227 20 1 Comigurng State ROWN 227 Chapter 27 i raa EE EE AA AEA EA A E E E E E 229 Ed PAG ONERE irii a a E i I 22
211. eding or violating the criteria Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client Two Rate Three Color Marker evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green After TRTCM is configured and DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets Red high loss priority level packets are dropped Yellow medium loss priority level packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network 282 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services Green low loss priority level packets are forwarded TRTCM operates in one of two modes color blind or color aware In color blind mode packets are marked based on evaluating against the PIR and CIR regardless of if they have previously been marked or not In the color aware mode packets are marked based on both existing color and evaluati
212. ee 43 Figure 9 Transceiver Installation EXD eiiis soper Se Prtr EXE Py nna EE PROA EXER MR PLA ES E RPPL AXE NR RM KS 45 Figure T0 stalled Transceiver iuiaiesgeeoudtestu Xe idc t tb tu C HERE UI EO raoi Er DUI ERR CU eR RA tru ERR FETU o LUDERE d 45 Figure 11 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example 1 rient ere rri rr torte E pet daa 45 Figure TZ Transceiver Removal Example iste seed teta sec sasha rr iia od eiii an s do ee ELO RR saan 45 Figure T3 Rear Parl AC Modol sasxsctunsiebxietubeepu ete oor upeteDe rc OP ID E DRE Peto be vu ERE TER amen 46 Figure 14 Rear Panel DG p ee 46 Figura 19 Web Configurator LOO iuedadtes bu cd rae B Ee rE trea ien ENE AAAA I aan AAE RPM AIL EENAA RNE KERS NE 52 Figure 16 Web Configurator Home Sereen Status isse ieri eter eERERIRIo USER REPEEEQ UE ERE E CERE RHER IUOS 52 Figure 17 Change Administrator Login PaASSword 44 e rtre a vere o e tei OUS A Ke Les RH EX beets 58 Figure 18 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port cccesecccceeeseeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeesecceeeesneecanenenseeaes 60 Figure 19 Web Configuretar Logout SOIGGIT 12i ocecc ssec br spesa terra erp eo tive Ree erede x aea PLI NI ce orb EU EE EpL 60 Figure 20 Initial Setup Network Example IP Interface ssssssssssssseeenee nenne 61 Figure 21 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeceeeeeeeeeseesesseesaeeaeeeeeeeeens 63 Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example POM VID
213. egator ID for the trunk group not the individual port XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Synchronized These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk Ports group Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 15 2 1 on page 134 for more information on this field Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP 15 4 Link Aggregation Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 15 1 on page 133 for more information on link aggregation Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting Link Aggregation Setting Status LACP Group ID Active T1 C T2 a T3 C T4 r T5 T6 C Port Group 1 None v 2 None v 3 None v 4 None v None v 6 None v 7 None v HUY i Apply Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide 135 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced A
214. el to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status BS Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on MRSTP This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP a panning Iree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MRSTP Tree T Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 001349000002 8000 001349000002 Hello Time second F4 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MRSTP to edit MRSTP settings on the Switch Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority
215. elated labels in this screen Table 59 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch d Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Table 59 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source po
216. ement gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade sse 281 Figure 171 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration sesssseeeee 282 Figure 172 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration sssssee 282 Figure 173 Management gt Access CONN 2uscisccese serre trarre tup ete renn ier Lena siae pea guai Sa LEE Apa SE PE MERE EE pER 285 Figure 174 SNMP Management Model iuuenes ci orit riter n Read kai nt ax n ERG ed 286 Figure 175 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP ausis akessiceeskkptta teri petere per belU aee EREMO Pe Era 291 Figure 176 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group sme 293 Figure 177 Management gt Access Control gt Logins eeseeeeeee enne ee than nn th nana nth nana hn 294 Figure 178 SSH Communication Exelmple 1 uiroo otn tior reta t eorr ttu epo ann E Ea Ra 295 zs TTO FON aah WV GIRS 4t 295 Figure 190 sBix ibe DLciciee ULM 297 Figure 181 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer enean enne hen nnne 297 Figure 182 Security Certificate 1 Netscape sees tener tna Rhen hau RR A REN MR A a aga ER RAA 298 Figure 183 Security Certificate 2 TN SCR isieseis bier evteccitetu Fesserko rei Er a Yan E Peg ai bou aed au Po Ve dep rada 298 Figure 184 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection eeeeeeeeeeeneennen nee 299 Figure 185 Management gt Access Control gt Service Acc
217. en where you can configure queuing with associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to a screen where you can activate and configure VLAN stacking Multicast This link takes you to screen where you can configure various multicast features and create multicast VLANs XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 6 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Auth and Acct This link takes you to screens where you can configure authentication and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source Guard This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network IP Application Static Route This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually RIP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the RIP Routing Information Protocol direction and versions OSPF This link takes you to screens where you can view the OS
218. ender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively 22 1 1 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA website for more information 22 1 2 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 22 1 3 IGMP Snooping The Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership
219. er s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Bindings are used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 100 IP Source Guard c ONE eee Static Binding DHCP Snooping Arp Inspection Index Mac Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 1 a1 12 12 12 12 01 172 23 37 222 inifinity static 1 18 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 IP Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manu
220. er 192 168 2 100 66 7 Delete Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 105 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply DHCP Status Select whether the Switch should function as a DHCP Server or Relay for the specified VID If you select Server then fields related to DHCP relay configuration are grayed out and vice versa Server Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP server for this VLAN Client IP Specify the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Pool Starting Address Size of Specify the size or count of the IP address pool The Switch can issue from 1 to 253 Client IP IP addresses to DHCP clients Pool IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for the client IP pool Mask Default Enter the IP address of the default gateway device Gateway Primary Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the RS da DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Server Relay Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP relay for this VLAN Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 3 Relay Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot
221. er a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Specify which traffic flow In Band or Out of band the Switch is to send packets Management originating from itself such as SNMP traps or packets with unknown source Select Out of band to have the Switch send the packets to the management port labelled MGMT This means that device s connected to the other port s do not receive these packets Select In Band to have the Switch send the packets to all ports except the management port labelled MGMT to which connected device s do not receive these packets Management IP Address Use these fields to set the settings for the out of band management port IP Address Enter the out of band management IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation For example 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 0 254 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top
222. er has paid for On the Switch configure priority level of the inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 21 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next Configure the fields as highlighted in the Switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 52 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA Len Data FCS Untagged Etype Ethernet frame DA SA TPID Priority VID Len Data FCS IEEE 802 1Q Etype customer tagged frame DA SA SPTPID Priority VID TPID Priority VID Len Data FCS Double tagged Etype frame Table 53 802 1Q Frame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Length and type of Ethernet frame Etype XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Table 53 802 1Q Frame SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol IDentifier Data Frame data VID Oo n VLAN ID F Frame Check Sequence 21 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications gt VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Figure 80 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking OKENE Active r1 0x8100 v
223. er to the section on IP Setup for more information on configuring IP domains Direction Select the RIP direction from the drop down list box Choices are Outgoing Incoming Both and None Version Select the RIP version from the drop down list box Choices are RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide OSPF This chapter describes the OSPF Open Shortest Path First routing protocol and shows you how to configure OSPF 28 1 OSPF Overview OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link state protocol designed to distribute routing information within an autonomous system AS An autonomous system is a collection of networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF offers some advantages over traditional vector space routing protocols such as RIP The following table summarizes some of the major differences between OSPF and RIP Table 85 OSPF vs RIP OSPF RIP Network Size Large Small with up to 15 routers Metrics Bandwidth hop count throughput round Hop count trip time and reliability Convergence Fa
224. ers Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails authentication to try and authenticate again Maximum time is 3000 seconds When a client fails MAC authentication its MAC address is learned by the MAC address table with a status of denied The timeout period you specify here is the time the MAC address entry stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared If you specify 0 for the timeout value then this entry will not be deleted from the MAC address table Note If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value then it supersedes this setting See Section 7 5 on page 81 Port This field displays a port number XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Table 42 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit MAC authentication on this port You must first allow MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigat
225. es power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Active Check this box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN IP peius IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Mask Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary format and add all the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1s in binary There are three 255s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this subnet based VLAN are tagged This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done c
226. escribes the labels in this screen Table 44 Advanced Application gt Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes Packet Format Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 untagged Ethernet Il tagged and Ethernet Il untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802 3 standards A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894 Ethernet I encapsulation Layer 2 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Table 44 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Ethernet Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in Type hexadecimal value Refer to Table 46 on page 154 for information Source MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six he
227. ess 113 Figure 51 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration ssssessss 113 Figure 52 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP ssssssseeeee 114 Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP sss 116 Figure 54 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP sss 117 Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP sssss 119 Figure 56 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP sse 121 Figure 57 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP 1 124 Figure 58 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control eese 128 Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control sssssssssssssssseeee 129 Figure 60 Advanced Application gt Mirroring 2i trs rte ertt Erba a Ru EE prb a qy keeren aeania 131 Figure 61 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status ssssseenm e 134 Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting 135 Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP 137 Figure 64 Trunking Example Physical Connections ssssssseee eene 138 Figure 65
228. ess Control sess 299 Figure 186 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management ssseeeeee 300 Figure 187 Management gt DEOIOSUG ise eco Hn Ro ocu Hep Dod qoa gu ce todan non dua he a e a 303 Figure Tom Manogement SSI uucsitende tne bn eiui eem N N NR 306 Figure 189 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup eire etras ere torta teh bbb darn cnn dnesne 307 Figure 130 Clustering Application Exaile isse eoo asia s enixe aain Saa e EEG RR px Ceu Ia EA ERR EE Y E teas 310 Figure 191 Management gt Cluster MslsQStieil 2 aire repa a FEE PERE 9T ete PrEN rer ss er dee rre ERO PERerE ER EE IR 310 Figure 192 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen sssssss 311 Figure 193 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch seesse 312 Figure 194 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration see 313 Figure 195 MAG Table TF OWOTIBEL irsin ri WR RPDUER FRE RULSSRKI VEU SHE RO dot ERE Rat SS Unt addita dcs ras 316 Figure 199 Management MAC Table D RTT 316 Figure 197 IP Table FIQWONON n M 317 Figure 198 Management gt IP Table acs a eh ccd n pk etai Ppa ea Ee oun bats nade n ll vedi 318 Figur 199 Management gt ARP Table mm 320 Figure 200 Mangsgerient Routing Tablo 1iuicssssseciix spp es pta EE ERE SEAS EE E ieee 321 Figure 201 Management gt Configure Clon
229. et the above fields back to the factory defaults 33 3 4 Configuring VRRP Parameters View the VRRP configuration summary at the bottom of the screen XGS 4528F User s Guide 271 Chapter 33 VRRP Figure 156 VRRP Configuration Summary Index Actwe Name Network VRID Primary VIP Uplink Gateway Priority Delete 1 Yes Example 192 168 1 10 24 1 192 168 1 1 192 168 1100 110 Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 109 VRRP Configuring VRRP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an entry Active This field shows whether a VRRP entry is enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays a descriptive name of an entry Network This field displays the IP address and subnet mask of an interface VRID This field displays the ID number of a virtual router Primary VIP This field displays the IP address of the primary virtual router Uplink Gateway This field displays the IP address of the uplink gateway Priority This field displays the priority level 1 to 255 of the entry Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 33 4 VRRP Configuration Examples The following sections show two VRRP configuration examples on the Switch 33 4 1 One Subnet Network Example The figure below shows a simple VRRP netw
230. et the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 23 2 5 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that the bolded values in the table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 Table 66 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Type 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch 23 3 Supported RADIUS Attributes Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This section lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This section lists the attributes used by authentication and accounti
231. ete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 23 1 2 on page 188 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 96 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup ORAS NENNNNP Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret 1 foo f oo ooo he or 1 poo f o 2 a Se Auth and Acct Delete Delete Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup authenticate wit
232. eud eddie teer de ddoc veu ed ddck eet dd dd vk rev dd E Rd I Eel ddp Exe 306 Table 128 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup eeeessseeeeeesseee eene then threats 307 Table 129 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications eeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeee eene nnn 309 Table 130 Management gt Cluster Management iiauaucccuci sescenti ttti t etta dues dnas akt d drea 311 Table 131 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example sss 312 Table 132 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration sse 313 Table 122 Managemen gt MAC Table secas oima naan De d b SU nee 316 Table 134 Management gt IP Table ssc sesiaec tases ep Rn bl brad Edi tb Ad aaa Kanana ana FER d Shanael ott adu aba pna abd lends 318 Table 135 Management gt ARP Table 24 ionic tna trant tu Enen En n E Eai 320 Table 196 Management gt Rouling Table iusesssei b eer Rr dr M ror L3 R3 S Od La re d SR Sd 321 Table 137 Management gt Configure Clone E 324 Table 138 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch iussa ccecscees cases ceessdeseesnnns sons ect eant bite 327 Table 139 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch 1 esses eene annt h haesit nnn had 327 Table 140 Troubleshooting the Fassword ioa topi E ePHO REEF ea xYEREIEREFEPPHI REFER REY FERE T HER PEHOIRAEE RIS 333 Table 141 Hardware Spe IS sce ceto tio epo REPERI RUKIER ANAN EFIE p E FE bere Lb RR 335 Table 142 Fimware SPE CM CANONS cs scious sts vcantutaent
233. external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a Switch IP address in each routing domain subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes 7 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System Info to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 25 Basic Setting gt System Info ED System N HN System Name XGS 4528F ZyNOS FAW Version V3 80 ARC 0 b4 07 04 2007 Ethernet Address 00 13 49 01 1fb0 Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit Cy Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status BOARD 1 0 1 0 1 0 75 0 Normal PHY 1 0 1 0 1 0 85 0 Normal MAC 1 0 1 0 1 0 85 0 Normal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN1 44 0 3100 Normal FAN2 41 0 0 3100 Normal FAN3 41 0 0 3100 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 1 2VIN 0 02 0 02 0 02 896 Error 1 25VIN 0 02 0 02 0 02 i 896 Error 1 8VIN 0 02 0 02 0 02 996 Error 3 3VIN 0 02 0 02 0 02 i 896 Error 12VIN 0 02 0 02 0 02 i 1096 Error The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DES
234. f the Switch D Click this link to log out of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview BASIC SETTING ANE IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT tting Application plication IP Application Management Management Management System Info VLAN Static Routing Maintenance ECHTE zur Static MAC Forwarding RIP Access Control Switch Setup Filtering OSPF Diagnostic pecu Spanning Tree Protocol IGMP Syslog Port Setup Bandwidth Control DVMRP Cluster Management Broadcast Storm Control DiffServ MAC Table Mirroring DHCP IP Table Link Aggregation VRRP ARP Table Port Authentication Routing Table Port Security Configure Clone Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast Auth and Acct IP Source Guard Loop Guard XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub links XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup Subnet Based VLAN Protocol Based VLAN Static VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP M
235. f the Switch s power is turned off Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from using in band management managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 2 3 A Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch Filter all traffic to the CPU port Disable all ports Misconfigure the text configuration file XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 6 Forget the password and or IP address 7 Prevent all services from accessing the Switch 8 Change a service port number but forget it BS Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch If you do lock yourself out try using out of band management via the management port to configure the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default
236. fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in RPM 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed 7 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting and General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 26 Basic Setting gt General
237. fault for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Type a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitations the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 10 100 1000M for a 1000Base T connection and 10G for a 10 Gigabit Ethernet connection XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port The choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex and 100M Full Duplex for a 1000Base T connection 1000M Full Duplex is supported by both 1000Base T and 1000Base X connections 10G Full Duplex is supported by the 10 Gigabit Ethernet connections Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre
238. figuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 34 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snapshots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 172 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration OLATI Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 34 Maintenance 34 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 34 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved back to
239. figure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 8 1 on page 87 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Figure 35 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting E VLAN Fort Setting J Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian VLAN Status GVRP O Port isolation r Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking i 1 r All M n 5 1 All M r 3 n H z Aan gt D 4 is All x r z 1 m All M n i z 1 r All M n n 1 All M r 8 1 All Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Port Isolation Port Isolation allows each port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the uplink ports but not communicate with each other This option is the most limiting but also the most secure Port This field displays the port number D Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same
240. file including the default password of 1234 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 19 Web Configurator Logout Screen NN Thank you for using the Web Configurator Please close the browser before next login Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the example network Configure an IP interface Configure DHCP server settings Createa VLAN Set port VLAN ID Enable RIP 5 1 1 Configuring an IP Interface On a layer 3 switch an IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port The default IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 In the example network since the RD network is already in the same IP interface as the Switch you don t need to create an IP interface for it However if you want to have the Sales network on a different routing domain you need
241. flow Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps 1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows 2 Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 19 on page 157 to configure policy rules 18 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 19 on page 157 Click Advanced Application gt Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown XGS 4528F User s Guide 151 Chapter 18 Classifier Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Classifier Active Name Layer 2 Layer 3 amp Classifier r Packet Format Au VLAN ii of Priorit GUN rior e Au j Ethernet Type C Others Hex MAC Add alles ress E C mac Port OM c Destinat MAC Add doni ress estination owel h h h LL h DSCP SAN Cc iz JAI Establish Only IP Protocol C Others Dec IP Address 0 0 0 0 Address Prefix t Source C Any Socket Numb ocket Number Ps IP Address D 0 0 Address Prefix 1g Destination C Any Socket Numbe oc umber c Add Cancel Clear The following table d
242. following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high 24 1 1 2 DHCP Snooping Database The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory If the Switch restarts it loads static bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings in which case the devices in the network have to send DHCP requests again As a result it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection in a file on an external TFTP server If you set up the DHCP snooping database the Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server The file has the following format Figure 98 DHCP Snooping Database File Format lt initial checksum gt TYPE DHCP SNOOPING VERSION 1 BEGIN lt binding 1 gt lt checksum 1 gt lt binding 2 gt lt checksum 1 2 gt lt binding n gt lt checksum 1 2 n gt END The lt initial checksum gt helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update
243. g on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information Chapter 32 on page 259 to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 105 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure VID D DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure J Configure Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply Enabled Option82 Information No O r1 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN You still have to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Option82 Select this to have the Switch add the slot number port
244. g port settings See port cloning copyright 353 CPU management port 100 current date 76 current time 76 customer support 357 D Database Description DD 232 daylight saving time 76 default gateway 265 Designated Router DR and OSPF 232 DHCP 259 client IP pool 265 configuration options 259 modes 259 relay agent 259 relay example 266 server 259 setup 264 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 259 DHCP relay option 82 203 DHCP snooping 201 configuring 203 DHCP relay option 82 203 trusted ports 202 untrusted ports 202 DHCP snooping database 202 diagnostics 303 Ethernet port test 303 ping 303 system log 303 Differentiated Service DiffServ 251 DiffServ 251 activate 254 and TRTCM 255 DS field 251 DSCP 251 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 256 network example 252 PHB 251 dimensions 335 disclaimer 353 double tagged frames 167 DR Designated Router 232 DS Differentiated Services 251 DSCP DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 256 service level 251 what it does 251 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 251 DVMRP Autonomous System 247 default timer setting 250 error message 249 graft 248 how it works 247 implementation 247 probe 248 prune 248 report 248 setup 248 terminology 248 threshold 249 DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 247 dynamic link aggregation 133 E egress port 102 Ethernet broadcast address 319 Ethernet port test 303 Ethernet ports 43 default settings 44 external authentication
245. gs counters This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See Chapter 44 on page 333 Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 5 DHCP Snooping Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure external TFTP server so that they are still available after a restart To open this screen cl
246. gt Auth and Acct Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control gt Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the RADIUS Server Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the TACACS Server Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch sup
247. guration 282 maintenance 279 current configuration 279 main screen 279 Management Information Base MIB 286 management port 102 managing the device good habits 38 using FTP See FTP using SNMP See SNMP using Telnet See command interface using the command interface See command interface using the web configurator See web configurator man in the middle attacks 203 max age 122 hops 122 metric 236 MIB and SNMP 286 supported MIBs 287 MIB Management Information Base 286 mini GBIC ports 44 connection speed 44 connector type 44 transceiver installation 44 transceiver removal 45 mirroring ports 131 monitor port 131 132 mounting brackets 40 MSA MultiSource Agreement 44 MST Instance See MSTI 111 MST region 111 MSTI 111 MST ID 111 XGS 4528F User s Guide Index MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance 110 MSTP 107 109 bridge ID 124 125 configuration 120 configuration digest 125 forwarding delay 122 Hello Time 124 hello time 122 Max Age 124 max age 122 max hops 122 MST region 111 network example 110 path cost 123 port priority 123 revision level 122 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 107 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 77 multicast 173 802 1 priority 175 and IGMP 173 IP addresses 173 overview 173 setup 174 175 multicast delivery tree 248 multicast group 178 multicast router mrouter 248 multicast VLAN 183 Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See MSTI 110 Multiple Spanning Tree P
248. h the second TACACS server authentication requests to LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Server Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends request response from the TACACS server the second TACACS server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 63 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup contin
249. he Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 20 Queuing Method XGS 4528F User s Guide VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your Switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN 21 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANs even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANS to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers
250. he allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended that you assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 24 on page 108 for more information Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Canc
251. he binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 4 DHCP Snooping Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping Figure 102 DHCP Snooping
252. herwise you see the screen as in the next figure Figure 134 DVMRP IGMP RIP Not Set Error IND Error IGMP should be turned on before setting DVMRP Back When you disable IGMP but DVMRP is still active you also see another warning screen Figure 135 DVMRP Unable to Disable IGMP Error Nis Warning DVMRP is still enabled DVMRP will not function if IGMP is turned off Back Each IP routing domain DVMRP configuration must be in a different VLAN group otherwise you see the following screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 30 DVMRP Figure 136 DVMRP Duplicate VID Error Message CD Error Error Routing domains with same VID can t enable DVMRP simultaneously Back 30 4 Default DVMRP Timer Values The following are some default DVMRP timer values Table 96 DVMRP Default Timer Values DVMRP FIELD DEFAULT VALUE Probe interval 10 sec Report interval 35 sec Route expiration time 140 sec Prune lifetime Variable less than two hours Prune retransmission time 3 sec with exponential back off Graft retransmission time 5 sec with exponential back off XGS 4528F User s Guide Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the Switch 31 1 DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are
253. his information 29 1 1 How IGMP Works This section describes how IGMP works and the changes it has gone through from version to version 3 IGMP version 1 defines how a multicast router checks to see if any multicast hosts are part of a multicast group It checks for group membership by sending out an IGMP Query packet Hosts that are members of a multicast group reply with an IGMP Report packet This is also referred to as a join group request The multicast router then keeps a list of all networks that have members of this multicast group and forwards multicast traffic to that network Figure 128 IGMP Version 1 Example The main difference in IGMP version 2 is that it provides a mechanism for a multicast group member to notify a multicast router that it is leaving a multicast group The multicast router then sends a group specific IGMP query to check if there are any members remaining in that group If the multicast router does not receive an IGMP report from any members it stops sending multicast traffic to that group This change helps shorten the leave convergence time in other words the amount of time that a multicast router believes that there are group members on a particular network This in turn helps reduce the amount of multicast traffic going through the multicast router XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 29 IGMP Figure 129 IGMP Version 2 Example IGMP version 3 allows a multicast host to join a multicast group
254. iA B 2 z PL 1 mj S ME P Sx H SeI L6 d To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 90 MVR Configuration Example OD Active iv Premium Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Mode Port Source Port Receiver Port Multicast Setting Group Configuration Tagging EXAMPLE p To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 91 MVR Group Configuration Example c OES Multicast VLAN ID 200 onfiguration lt 5 Name Start Address End Address Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 200 m News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Li EX PLE ERES EXAMPLE Figure 92 MVR Group Configuration Example EIMA MVR Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address poo 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 Dn News 2241 4 10 224 1 4 50 Delete Cancel EXAMPLE XGS 4528F User s Guide Authe
255. ibers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user on the same network VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain BS VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 8 on page 87 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 7 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 27 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup EmA 902 10 VLAN Type C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active C MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment evel eve eve eve eve eve 6 5 4 evel3 2 1 0 eve Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen
256. ication method Simple or MD5 to activate authentication Select None default to disable authentication Usually interface s and virtual interface s should use the same authentication method as the associated area If interface s and virtual interface s use different authentication methods than the associated area the authentication methods are based on the interface s and virtual interface s settings XGS 4528F User s Guide 237 Chapter 28 OSPF Table 90 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Stub Network Select this option to set the area as a stub area If you enter 0 0 0 0 in the Area ID field the settings in the Stub Area fields are ignored No Summary Select this option to set the Switch to not send receive LSAs Default Route Cost Specify a cost between 0 and 16777214 used to add a default route into a stub area for routes which are external to an OSPF domain If you do not set a route cost no default route is added Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 28
257. ick Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Figure 103 DHCP Snooping Configure DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active L CR Disable an X aEEB Database Agent URL hean RR Timeout interval 300 seconds Write delay interval 300 seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Renew Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 DHCP Snooping Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch You still have to enable DHCP snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a specific VLAN Note You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 24 5 2 on page 213 to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from different VLAN Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 73 DHCP Snooping Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval it is possible that the next update is scheduled to occur before the curre
258. iginal port s Type the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number x Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 132 XGS 4528F User s Guide Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 15 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports yo
259. igure 1 The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port from which this source MAC address came 2 The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC Table Ifthe Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port Ifthe Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion Ifthe Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame XGS 4528F User s Guide 315 Chapter 39 MAC Table Figure 195 MAC Table Flowchart E Forward to all ports in the MAC Table Is destination MAC address Yes Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to frame outgoing port 39 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 196 Management MAC Table Sort by Index 1 2 3 4 5 ARS Table MAC VID Port MAC Address VID Port Type 00 85 a0 01 01 00 1 8 dynamic 00 85 a0 01 01 04 1 8 dynamic 00 a0 5 00 00 01 1 2 dynamic O0 a0 c5 fe ea 71 1 CPU static O0 a0 c5 fe ea 71 2 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 133 Management MAC Tab
260. iiti r ra ett taa ke paa tea xao Fe bei soni c aa Pa d cbr toph e 64 gosse ort p Cn E R 67 gp I Satis Por DAE emm 69 Figure 25 Basic Setting gt Sy Stam INO asssasszecsstesee siosssepritisd ert preaisss Ve ERAN PRU AIRMRPRM A33 RERUA IS AR EL S 74 Figure 2b Basic Setting gt General Setup uius iere chus tape EE corp rt REX XE NEn E CHR ABRE II EP RR pd Kai 75 Figure 27 Basic Setting gt Switch SQW ssccsciescirciecs den pci ria rer nir debt cL LAE nnn Mir E bx VE EE UV E pU Ud 78 Figure 29 Basic setting IP SEND ahaa cde n S tO verc o eR ELS MR eX os prb nS 80 Figure 29 Basic Sotang Forn SEUD scrani nnan uten oie nA tut Peta cto su iot roD PEOR D QE Fop E UR PPAR D ER RUE 82 Figure 30 Part VLAN TUK e 89 Figure 31 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type sciceutssskicidecssricwieescnceniadesnaiamudeanatianiaaroncco E RERO cup dung 89 Figure 32 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status ssssssssssssseeenenemememenmenennn 90 Figure 33 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail sess 90 Figure 34 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN ou cceceeeeeeeceeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecencnueaaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 91 Figure 35 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting sse 93 Figure 36 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeecneeeceeceeeeeeeeeseeeensaeaeeeeeeeees 94 Figure 37 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Sub
261. information Click Advanced Applications gt Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule EN Policy Active Name Classifier s General Metering Bandwidth Kbps Out of Profile Egress Port 1 Parameters a i DSCP Priority Ov DSCP TOS Ov Forwarding No change Discard the packet Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority 9 No change Setthe packet s 802 1 priority Send the packet to priority queue Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Set the packet s TOS field C2 Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Action Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packet to the egress port Metering Enable Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action Set Out Drop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Classifier s Delete Delete Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification
262. ing VLAN Port based VLAN setting Tag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K 1024 static maximum Supports GVRP Double tagging for VLAN stacking Protocol Based VLAN Subnet Based VLAN Port Aggregation Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking Six groups up to 8 ports each Port mirroring All ports support port mirroring Support port mirroring per IP TCP UDP Bandwidth control Supports rate limiting at 64K increment Layer 3 Features IP Capability IPV4 support 64 IP routing domains 2K IP address table Wire speed IP forwarding Routing protocols Unicast RIP V1 V2 OSPF V2 Multicast DVMRP IGMP V1 V2 V3 Static Routing VRRP IP services DHCP relay VLAN based DHCP server relay DHCP Snooping Security IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Static MAC address filtering Limiting number of dynamic addresses per port XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 45 Product Specifications The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Switch Table 144 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet II Encapsulation RFC 1058 RIP 1 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1112 IG
263. ing Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses 22 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 22 1 on page 173 for more information on multicasting XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting OMS NN Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active Ci Host Timeout 260 IGMP Snooping Leave Timeout 2 802 1p Priority No Change IGMP Filtering Active O Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding C Drop Reserved Multicast Group c Flooding Drop Port Immed Leave 1 r1 2 O 3 ri 4 O 5 r1 6 C 7 r Group Limited Max Group Num IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Querier Mode r Default z Auto x z p Default Auto x o Default Auto z o Default Auto 5 b Default Auto gt z b Defaut z Auto z b Default Auto D Defa Cancel Apply i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Advanced Application
264. ing Exam iE 12 5 3 0 nd 1o LS Moon ao nd d ccs dua atc Ouod o ona OR wes 168 Figure 80 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking sssseee eene 170 Figure 81 Advanced Application gt BIUIEIESIBE uiioiossie correr ite pte brio vet A CPuU EE eva EXON E RUP E TEE ena Fa aaan 174 XGS 4528F User s Guide List of Figures Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting sse 175 Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 177 Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile 178 Figure 25 MYR Nabwork Example i4 oc sass deers aes Fx gabe ted Ra Cen areas a aso ao ea ead on ar eL 180 Figure oo MVR Multicast Television Example senserce ke bey eRAREEPPF2 a AEE a 181 Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR seeeene 182 Figure 88 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting MVR Group Configuration 184 Figure 09 MYR Coniguraton EXample icis pEpbe Peer EEt Pe Ec p EptPP RE ERU DIR RREN ac Ue tUHtbIdenEQ 185 Figure 90 MYR Coniguraton EXIIDDISE scc d eden dade oet oce o ade Monete oec Rn ERROR 185 Figure 91 MVR Group Configuration Example eeeeeseeeeeees esee eet nh annua nnn anna nita ana n 186 Figure 92 MVR Group Configuration EXempla auae ces ereni tiorem teo pr tuae
265. ing RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 35 6 1 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH 35 7 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the Switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the Switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a
266. ink on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Mirroring This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens 14 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 60 Advanced Application gt Mirroring D Mirroring g Active CO Monitor Port f Port Mirrored Direction C Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress gt Ingress Ingress Ingress eee eee Apply Cancel De oror ER Ek EE 4 XGS 4528F User s Guide 131 Chapter 14 Mirroring The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail Port without interfering with the traffic flow on the or
267. inued LABEL DESCRIPTION Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted HTTP ICMP computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control XGS 4528F User s Guide Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 36 1 Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 187 Management gt Diagnostic Diagnostic g Resolving 192 168 1 23 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful Ei System Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address Ping Ethernet Port Test Port 1 Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 125 Management gt Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device tha
268. ion panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 17 1 About Port Security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch The Switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated 17 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security Figure 71 Advanced Application gt Port Security E Port Security g Active O Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address gt e i v booo 2 v b 2 b r e b z o o r e poem 7 v b Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Advanced Applicati
269. is certificate you should examine this site srl TS ly willing to to accept this certificate for the purpose of identifying th Wel il Ji 00a0c5012345 Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site e m Figure 183 Security Certificate 2 Netscape x Vou haus isa connection with 19 1 E ity CNrtificate presented belong Fa G E a It possible though unlikely that someone may be trying tgfntercept your conmmurica If you suspect the certificate shown does not belong to 192 168 1 1 please cancel the connection and notify the site administrator View Certificate i T Cancel Help 35 8 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Figure 184 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection Jj web Configurator Microsoft Int t Explorer Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help e 9 3 3 9 0 9 di 5 m sid Address ei https 192 168 0 1 rpsys html Go Save Status E Logout E Help ED Port Statu S g Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time T Down STOP Disabled
270. is screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting gt Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 29 Basic Setting gt Port Setup OLED Port Active Name Type Speed Duplex enl 802P BPDU Control Control Priority 1 wf tonooncoom ato r og Per vr 2 M Ss 10 100 1 000M auo n ox Peer gt 3 M p 10 1001 000M ato n o Peer 4 Hv IL 1 10 100 1 000M auo o 0 Peer v 5 M Nise wee all 10 100 1 000M auto o Peer gt M E 10 100 1 000M auo v o Peer gt 7 M 10 00 1000M Auto Sd Oy Peer gt 8 M NEM 10r00 000M Auto z Ov Peer ra 10G Fu e ri Oy eer m 2 Wl w 10G FullDuplex r Ox Per a too 10G Full Duplex r o Peer gt 2 Ml we 10G FullDuplex m Ox Peer The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory de
271. isplays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Database detail First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for any reason Last ignored bindings counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See Chapter 44 on page 333 Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vians This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP binding database Total ignored bindin
272. istration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 14 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process Heb ene Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members ontro Registration Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable Frame Type You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enab
273. ive ner Erbe n P Pe vn ct bad 262 32 4 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example ecce ecce enne ttrn nn inn 263 22 5 Configuring DHCP VLAN SOMNIS auos uscire ns Ritt Rittal tra etn la semaanatisiaind 264 32 5 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two YLANS aiino p cH PERDE E M qu DH E IM II NM tiU 266 Chapter 33 bise 267 XGS 4528F User s Guide Table of Contents 33 CT qe S 267 vu POMP PRP MEH E ETIT EEE OE EA AEE NAE EEEIEE ETE INE EA E TA 268 Soe RU ient T H 268 ao aT IF gir e P 268 odd d VRRP Paramotor E usc otn e v qui A T iva 270 33 3 3 Configuring VRRP Parameters 22 sucer ep uaie tta bursa epus epu Sube ssesss eaaa 270 33 9 4 Configuring VRRP Parameters ois isieacdous ianersnts tt rite tua Rt FIR a end E a Return E iD Eid 271 324 VRRF COMMUNION EXSTBS duicxiidembebP toS bep UTE aS OL HF EPtDNE FO EFE CU MY ERU DdR BERE 272 334 1 One Subnet Network Example 3 57 ort iba rper DX eR po d n pa t RE o rta ae 272 332 nuc Subnels EXImple ualet dii tenth endi Fre Eu a HF aana ba dd 273 Part V Management sssiiiesasebinisn iiias einasi 277 Chapter 34 PAN a HG aiaa can biacrsdiaiglvearcddvgiVenneautiaanelie aesemhdsastiarebnaabienadieaimiasia 279 34 1 The Maintenance Sere sareno ede dimen ened amie ee 279 ee Lea FEON Die Feat mecnm 280 343 Gave ETE NE IED sitet tec wie do TIC m 280 O44 REDGOT SYSTEM
274. ives only routing information from a trusted layer 3 devices activate authentication The OSPF supports three levels of authentication None no authentication is used Simple authenticate link state updates using an 8 printable ASCII character password e MD5 authenticate link state updates using a 16 printable ASCII character password To configure an area set the related fields in the OSPF Configuration screen Figure 123 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup OSPF Configuration Interface Virtual Link Status Active Dr Router ID 0 0 0 0 Redistribute Route Active Type Metric value RIP Vv 1B 15 Static Vv 1E 15 Apply Cancel 2 Name Area ID nono Authentication None Stub Network T No Summary O Default route cost 15 Add Cancel Clear Index Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 90 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Area ID Enter a 32 bit ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation that uniquely identifies an area A value of 0 0 0 0 indicates that this is a backbone also known as Area 0 You can create only one backbone area on the Switch Authentication Select an authent
275. k to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network Loop Guard Use the loop guard feature to protect against network loops on the edge of your network IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Port Authentication and Security For security the Switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide 337 Chapter 45 Product Specifications Table 142 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Authentication and The Switch supports authentication and accounting services via Accounting RADIUS and TACACS AAA servers Device Management Use the web configurator or commands to easily configure the rich range of features on the Switch Port Cloning Use the port cloning feature to copy the settings you configure on one port to another port or ports Syslog The Switch can generate syslog messages and send it to a syslog
276. ka Republika Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web www zyxel dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland Support E mail support zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web www zyxel fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone 49 2405 6909 69 Fax 49 2405 6909 99 Web www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 Wuerselen Germany Hungary Support E mail support g zyxel hu Sales E mail info zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest Hungary XGS 4528F User s Guide Appendix C Customer Support India Support E mail support zyxel in Sales E mail sales zyxel in Telephone 91 11 30888144 to 91 11 30888153 Fax 91 11 30888149 91 11 26810715 Web http www zyxel in Regular Mail India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd II Floor F2 9 Okhla Phase 1 New Delhi 11
277. l the ports as soon as you make them Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strictly Priority services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth weight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Weight When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights Q0 Q7 This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Select a queue Q0 to Q7 to have the Switch use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue for the 1000Base T 1000Base X and 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports For example if you select Q5 the Switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using Strictly Priority Select None to always use WFQ or WRR Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory T
278. lation freestanding 39 precautions 40 interface 234 and OSPF 238 interface and OSPF 232 Internal Router IR 231 Internet setting up your browser 330 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 352 introduction 35 IP capability 339 interface 79 268 routing domain 79 services 339 XGS 4528F User s Guide Index setup 79 IP multicast example 243 IP source guard 201 ARP inspection 201 203 DHCP snooping 201 static bindings 201 IP table 317 how it works 317 J Java permissions 332 L LACP 133 system priority 137 timeout 138 layer 2 features 339 layer 3 features 339 LEDs 47 limit MAC address learning 148 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 133 link aggregation 133 dynamic 133 ID information 134 setup 135 136 status 134 link state database 232 234 lockout 58 log 303 login 51 password 58 login account Administrator 293 non administrator 294 login accounts 293 configuring via web configurator 293 multiple 293 number of 293 login password 294 loop guard 221 how it works 222 port shut down 223 probe packet 222 loop guard vs STP 221 LSA Link State Advertisement 232 MAC Media Access Control 74 MAC address 74 319 maximum number per port 148 MAC address learning 78 95 97 103 148 specify limit 148 MAC authentication 142 aging time 145 MAC filter and ARP inspection 204 MAC table 315 how it works 315 viewing 316 maintenance configuration backup 282 firmware 281 restoring confi
279. ld displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 19 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 18 4 on page 155 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule Figure 77 Policy Example K Policy Active iv Test Example Name lassifier s General Bandwidth Out of Profile Parameters harese Ror i DSCP Priority o DSCP s lox Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Send the packetto priority queue Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Action C Setthe packet s TOS field Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packet to the egress port Metering Iv Drop the packet
280. le LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below MAC Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen XGS 4528F User s Guide IP Table This chapter introduces the IP table 40 1 IP Table Overview The IP Table screen shows how packets are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports When a device which may belong to a VLAN group sends a packet which is forwarded to a port on the Switch the IP address of the device is shown on the Switch s IP Table The IP Table also shows whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static belonging to the Switch The Switch uses the IP Table to determine how to forward packets See the following figure 1 The Swit
281. le sse 238 XGS 4528F User s Guide 25 List of Figures Figure 125 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface cccssccccessscceceeetseneeeeeeteenees 239 Figure 126 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Virtual Link eene 240 Figure 127 IF Multicast sissors aain in TA Senden a aiaiai 243 Figure 120 IGMF Version T EXSINDIS ae iisetnr aidexie rex Urdu ER a RU Ud eta ria os d RR eta as 244 Figure 129 IGMP Version 2 EXSINDES sete retet ei bete se ia eeertuba eet e xe ches bebe oecue v bula qeu eU PEARLS URUA 245 Figure 130 IGMP Version 3 Example 25 2 trenta cott puncta nina sensi Ett PRX DR 0A 245 Foure Toi IP Appication radit me 246 Figure T32 How ev AR ORN aean A 248 Figure 123 IP Application DYMRP uai strato ro alesis dss een b nant pastes tanks RR da E needs 248 Figure 134 DVMRP IGMP RIP Not Set EO iine ci rnt ha aaa Eta Redi Eon kan Ehren ER edra a 249 Figure 135 DVMRP Unable to Disable IGMP EMOT 5 aauiscie ette ttti epe tn nue te prata ee oret dae peo bete au e uinaae 249 Figure 136 DVMRE Duplicate VID Error Message iicet tartara t enger rt tt ntn 250 Figure 137 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field Lu aiceeiecessispertresbepuiive c bro pt eT EREE PIENE npa OUS qk iranda aina 251 Figure 133 DINGerv NEIWOIK eme 252 Figure 139 TRTCM Color blind BOO uico iere Era Een dedi tna n t ai RP XE ER dg 253 Figure 140 TRTCM E olor aware Mode 16s
282. le VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices The following figure describes VLAN Trunking Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 30 Port VLAN Trunking c E N P d w v v2 N o vi v2 8 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen Figure 31 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type L Switch Setup 302 10 VLAN Type C Port Based 8 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be e sent toa VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the
283. led 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 959 674 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 1T Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 20 Down STOP Disabled 674 1201 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 21 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 22 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 24 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 25 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 26 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Clear Counter A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is saved in the configuration file from which the Switch booted from and it stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off See Section 34 3 on page 280 for information on saving your settings to a specific configuration file C Click this link to go to the status page o
284. lete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 22 6 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 85 MVR Network Example 22 6 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group 22 6 2 MVR Modes Y
285. lication and RIP in the navigation panel 2 Select Both in the Direction field to set the Switch to broadcast and receive routing information In the Version field select RIP 1 for the RIP packet format that is universally supported a mium Active v Index Network Direction Version 1 172 23 19 95 24 Both RIP 1 x 2 192 168 1 1 24 Both x RIP 1 Apply Cencel EXAMPLE Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example XGS 4528F User s Guide System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 6 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 6 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 23 Status LACP Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled TxPkts eo eO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o0 e D Fort Status J Port Name Link State 3 Down STOP 2 Down STOP 3 Down STOP 4 Down STOP 5 Down
286. lltering ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeceeeeeeeee seg eeaaeaeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenas 105 Table 24 SIP PAN COSIO ARR Tm 108 Jabple 25 STP PO INOS arrr AERA 108 Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration sseseeesssss 113 Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP sss 114 Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP sss 116 Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP 1 eee 117 Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP suus 119 Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP sse 122 Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP sss 124 Table 33 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control 1 eremo threat sh ax habra dad EI i 128 Table 34 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control sse 130 Table 35 Advanced Application gt MITOIN 2 iiiieccccisit teet ttes taken ttc teret setate NEES dt etas 132 Table 36 Link Aggregation ID Local Swllel iiec enr pup pA EE tr e d eta HERI A XX PEU Aaa EA 134 Table 37 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch sessirnar a PR I Ie EpE A 134 Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status ssssss emm 134 XGS 452
287. lowed by a space and the IP address of your Switch 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 34 Maintenance 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 111 on page 283 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 34 8 3 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 112 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mo
288. main Area This field displays the area ID Router ID This field displays the unique ID of the Switch Transmit Delay This field displays the transmission delay in seconds XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF Table 88 OSPF Status Common Output Fields continued FIELD DESCRIPTION State This field displays the state of the Switch backup or DR designated router Priority This field displays the priority of the Switch This number is used in the designated router election Designated This field displays the router ID of the designated router Router Backup This field displays the router ID of a backup designated router Designated Router Time Intervals This field displays the time intervals in seconds configured Configured Neighbor Count This field displays the number of neighbor routers Adjacent This field displays the number of neighbor router s that is adjacent to the Switch Neighbor Count Neighbor Neighbor ID This field displays the router ID of the neighbor Pri This field displays the priority of the neighbor This number is used in the designated router election State This field displays the state of the neighbor backup or DR designated router Dead Time This field displays the dead time in seconds Address This field displays the IP address of a neighbor Interface This field displays the
289. mode RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you configure on the Switch This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch 11 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 51 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration Spanning Tree Configuration Status Rapid Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Mode C Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Mode Select Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Spanning Tree See Section 11 1 on page 107 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide 113 Ch
290. n 8 1 on page 87 for more information on static VLAN To configure a static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 34 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN eo VID e EIR NEN VLAN Status ACTIVE r1 Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Tagging Normal iv TxTagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden v TxTagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 6 amp Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging T Normal C Fixed Forbidden M Tx Tagging ri C Fix idden j Q ee cm Add Cancel Clear Active Name Delete Yes 1 O Delete Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you w
291. n exact representation of your device The Switch Computer Notebook computer el Server Firewall NN LL Ns oe enum a E V2 cc cd e N um Gea ug I np E c Im Telephone Switch Router we M n lt XGS 4528F User s Guide a Safety Warnings Safety Warnings O For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions e e e e e e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with same type and rating of fuse Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right
292. n field enter a password eight character long When you select MD5 in the Authentication field enter a password 16 character long Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays an index number of an entry Name This field displays a descriptive name of a virtual link Peer Router ID This field displays the ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation of a peer border router Authentication This field displays the authentication method used Same as Area None Simple or MD5 Key ID When the Authentication field displays MD5 this field displays the identification number of the key used Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF XGS 4528F User s Guide IGMP This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch as a multicast router See also Section 22 4 on page 177 for information on IGMP snooping 29 1 IGMP Overview IP multicast
293. na Eae i PR RA ER ie i a 215 Figure 108 ARP Inspection Log e 216 Figure TOS ARF inspochon OOPEIUESE ascia kept bey RR LER IRURE GUERRE ERR EN SVERRHE ERE EU INCL EE UO adi s 217 Figure THAR Inspection Port Configure sccsrsnnsseieinciiinna r Cei REO dne PM DUT dM EDUUE 218 Figure 111 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure 12 4 ccce trauen tabu oiiaii iana E Anii 219 Figure 112 Loop Guard vs SIP ct dpi acca pla a A E A E pana ed ear 221 Foe TE onh n LO E aa NNa 222 Figure 174 Loop Guard Probe PSEBBL 1 idt re ptt EY RELIH SA REC ERI n weammneetieiee 222 Figure 7159 Loop Guard Network LOGI icc iare rUEP e E E EtOERUE iaa aiana CbxU E FL TEL huaa 222 Figure 116 Advanced Application gt LOOP Guard seiniin aneii airaa 223 Figure TIT IP Application Statie Roving caine ainda oe 227 Figure 108 IP Applicaton gt RIP casa ea ce acces E E v Ou EIE S MERI p TER toe EH pU RI tees 230 Figure 119 OSPF Network EXample A 232 Figure 120 OSPF Router Election Example 1 irren iste tapete d kit it bh pnl ka tb ra n bene 233 Figure Tz 1 IP Application OSPF SITUE Herr EFI EE rEPPA E qo RO Pr pep b w iac RERO REMIT ERI M MOS 234 Figure 122 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings 236 Figure 123 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup sss 237 Figure 124 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Summary Tab
294. ncel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel EXAMPLE To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN 1 Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 2 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add 3 Click Add 8 11 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created LES When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it BS In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID XGS 4528F User s Guide Incoming 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Setting Wizard All connected v Apply The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports Isolated from the drop down list depending on your VLAN and VLAN se
295. ncluding those with CRC error but it does not include the 802 3x Pause packets TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and
296. nel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 111 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure ARF Inspection VLA onfigure Configure VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Log No None Apply Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN Log Specify when
297. net Based VLAN 95 Figure 38 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example issicasscdsscaniedasnccdueeesnsaduee road dI A rr Dl ido cb Rute 97 XGS 4528F User s Guide 23 List of Figures Figure 39 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN 97 Figure 40 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example cccccsssecceeeseseceeeeeeseeceeeeesseeceeeeenseaaes 99 Figure 41 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected 100 Figure 42 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation 101 Figure 43 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding sees 103 Figure 44 Advanced Application gt Fiering ssrsisisssssicerinmisinenisninn descend tena idee 105 Figure 45 MRS IFP Network Example ices x vanocesenvxavaccarans eapacataa keel ita e beber Rt n ELE B tad aa eda d 109 Figure 46 S TEIBSTP Network EXITDIS o inidesit oko IHEEREPIUBRRERPEIND E eden ania 110 Figure dr MS TF NOWO EXGIDIS 1c teted assa tende duct an dott Dp ae dot GR d 111 Figure 48 MS Tis in Different Regions ee T 112 Figure 49 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example c cccisssncccevssecancnervseaneasversimnacmenisenecsevnrtuneaenuvenees 112 Figure 50 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol ccceeesececceeceeeeeeeeeeeesesneeneecaeeaeeeee
298. net network On The link to a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down 1000Base X Mini GBIC Slots A 1 24 Green On The port has a successful connection Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data Off This link is disconnected XGS 4528F User s Guide PART II Basic Configuration The Web Configurator 51 Initial Setup Example 61 System Status and Port Statistics 67 Basic Setting 73 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the Switch for example the default is 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field P
299. nfiguration screen 33 3 1 IP Interface Setup Before configuring VRRP first create an IP interface or routing domain in the IP Setup screen see the Section 7 6 on page 79 for more information XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 33 VRRP Click IP Application VRRP and click the Configuration link to display the VRRP Configuration screen as shown next N You can only configure VRRP on interfaces with unique VLAN IDs S Routing domains with the same VLAN ID are not displayed in the table indicated Figure 154 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt IP Interface OFT Status Index Network Authentication 1 192 168 1 10 24 None v Apply Cancel Active O Name name Network 192 168 1 10 24 v Virtual Router ID 15 Adertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode Iv Priority 100 Uplink Gateway 0 0 0 0 Primary Virtual IP 0 0 0 0 Secondary Virtual IP 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel Clear Index Actie Name Network VRID Primary VIP Uplink Gateway Priority Delete 1 Yes Example 192 168 1 10 24 1 192 168 1 1 192 158 1 100 110 rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 107 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt IP Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an entry Network This field displays the IP address and number of subnet mask bit of an IP domain Authentication Select None to disable authentica
300. nfiguring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide 313 Chapter 38 Cluster Management Table 132 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members Candidate List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link
301. ng Tree Protocol RSTP MRSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 116 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard t Loop Guard Active m Port 3 aHa Hupun HaHaHa UO nA A UNG Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays a port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4528F User s Guide 223 Chapter 25 Loop Guard Table 82 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the Switch it is connected to is in loop state If the Switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation
302. ng a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 24 STP Path Costs LINK RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED ALLOWED SPEED VALUE RANGE RANGE Path 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Cost Path 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Cost Path 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Cost Path 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 Cost On each bridge the bridge communicates with the root through the root port The root port is the port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN 11 1 2 How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constr
303. ng functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting 23 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 23 3 1 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name the format of the User Name attribute is enab where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 23 3 1 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 23 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type This value is set to Ethernet 15 on the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator 23 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 23 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events NAS IP Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session ID The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 2007041917210300000001 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Acco
304. nooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown See Section 22 1 4 on page 174 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN Mode VLAN Name VID Index CESME Snooping VLAN Name VID Delete Multicast Setting C auto C fixed Apply Cancel Add Cancel Clear Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to three VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time
305. nt update has finished successfully or timed out In this case the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database The location should be expressed like this tftp Homain name or IP addressy directory if applicable file name for example tftp 192 168 10 1 database txt Timeout interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Write delay interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database the first time the current bindings change after an update Once the next update is scheduled additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in the next update Renew DHCP Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database and click Renew if you want the Switch to load it You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database it does not discard the current dynamic bindings first If there is a conflict the Switch keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP Snooping screen Section 24 4 on page 207 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses the
306. ntication amp Accounting This chapter describes how to configure authentication and accounting settings on the Switch 23 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section 23 1 2 on page 188 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section 23 1 2 on p
307. number Agent port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays Server or Relay for the DHCP mode DHCP Status For DHCP server configuration this field displays the starting IP address and the size of the IP address pool For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP 32 5 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays two VLANs VIDs and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each V
308. o all incoming frames received on this port Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 8 on page 87 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority On the Switch configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking XGS 4528F User s Guide Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features 22 1 Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 s
309. o configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the De
310. o configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the Maintenance firmware and configuration files 34 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 167 Management gt Maintenance Maintenance nd Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Config 2 Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 m The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 110 Management gt Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the Switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Configuration Backup Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Configuration Load Factory Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings Default XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 34 Maintenance Table 110 Management gt Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Configuration S
311. of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 2 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 2 on page 46 for details Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key t o enter debug mode Type at1c after the Enter Debug Mode message Wait for the Starting XMODI upload on your terminal EM upload message before activating XMODEM After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 18 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V1 00 01 23 2007 11 56 33 RAM Size 64 Mbytes DRAM POST Testing 65536K OK DRAM Test SUCCESS FLASH Intel 32M ZyNOS Version V3 80 ARC 0 b4 07 04 2007 19 06 37 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode ras atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 393216 bytes received Erasing ras atgo The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration
312. of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID XGS 4528F User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 210 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 mt i at i i i M mmmh i I L L L I L I i I L I L I L 7 n mm m m m m m um m 9 How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2
313. of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier Mode The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast 22 4 IGMP S
314. ol 11 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on RSTP BS This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second uU Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority plus the MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a se
315. ol dn E SIS TTE TTE 43 SN NBI uec air RET T KERATAN ENAN 43 az TODO BASH 0 PONS cussusieadinpipoddtes tuia parre bir S ovt pedi Eee Cup dere Lc es eau bees db cnr ebd 44 XGS 4528F User s Guide LE Table of Contents 31 9 MI UNS aieo ttc a oir arcte i a oto bd ER apicc tes acad 44 eode e Ta E BT E D EOM 46 CO REL REI rnm 47 232 2 Extemal Backup Power Supply Connector s c7csssassstesssvaeseedtsanesdinatieriaotaseeieeecsonaess 47 Jaa Nonus MER E E Lm eck 47 BO LEDS e 47 Part Il Basic Gonngur a DEus vecep DU FR pra Hac OxE Exda dd d dE ES daba GU PIE DE 49 Chapter 4 ILLA ER 51 Su c ert rd 51 JI SPs LINN dcteiodastbuetiusd an ttu trlatvasixe aerei Rec ris vans vol n ee Us MeL tbas E dR ER Ds hugA 51 AS TRE Slate SOR MEM 52 4a 1 Change Your Password aisuedetacei eb ed etai eduinp nad dug t PA ODE UR EA NEEE Eiana KE EAA HU EB aE 58 233 guit YOU CCORHDODU ODIT aside osi tree perry EHEEINPRRERPEIQI KE PP CNN PREREHDADIPA reer nner eat rentrere teres veer nr 58 BS cree lj Ane 58 46 Res tting the Switch aem 59 4 6 1 Reload the Contgurador Fie ionsccccei c sesancccc mnsine 59 4 7 Logging Qui of the Web Configurator 15 ora tI rrr Pre eI UE PP LS FERRE A E DER PR FER rr Rr 60 LE oo E UM ER 60 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example snaa 61 AN OVON ERR TET 61 TT Configuring an IP HOOP BIO irat icn id d born dpa etit acce i tM sica c
316. on gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch Port This field displays a port number d Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some of the settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address Learning learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device must wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses ages out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0
317. on against the PIR and CIR If the packets do not match any of colors then the packets proceed unchanged 31 2 1 TRTCM Color blind Mode All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green Figure 139 TRTCM Color blind Mode Exceed NO 31 2 2 TRTCM Color aware Mode In color aware mode the evaluation of the packets uses the existing packet loss priority TRTCM can increase a packet loss priority of a packet but it cannot decrease it Packets that have been previously marked red or yellow can only be marked with an equal or higher packet loss priority Packets marked red high packet loss priority continue to be red without evaluation against the PIR or CIR Packets marked yellow can only be marked red or remain yellow so they are only evaluated against the PIR Only the packets marked green are first evaluated against the PIR and then if they don t exceed the PIR level are they evaluated against the CIR Figure 140 TRTCM Color aware Mode YES XGS 4528F User s Guide 253 Chapter 31 Differentiated Services 31 3 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen
318. on the Switch You should do this if you want the Switch to act as a multicast router Threshold Threshold is the maximum time to live TTL value TTL is used to limit the scope of multicasting You should reduce this value if you do not wish to flood Layer 3 devices many hops away with multicast traffic This applies only to multicast traffic this Switch sends out Index Index is the DVMRP configuration for the IP routing domain defined under Network The maximum number of DVMRP configurations allowed is the maximum number of IP routing domains allowed on the Switch See Section 7 6 on page 79 for more information on IP routing domains Network This is the IP routing domain IP address and subnet mask you set up in IP Setup VID DVMRP cannot be enabled on the same VLAN group across different IP routing domains that is you cannot have duplicate VIDs for different DVMRP configurations see Figure 136 on page 250 Active Select Active to enable DVMRP on this IP routing domain Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 30 3 1 DVMRP Configuration Error Messages You must have IGMP RIP enabled when you enable DVMRP ot
319. onfigure the Switch to filter traffic based on the traffic s source destination MAC addresses and or VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 44 Advanced Application gt Filtering ED Filtering d Active C Name Discard source Action Discard destination MAC L BL B HL BE VID Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Action Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 23 Advanced Application gt Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 10 Filtering Table 23 Advanced Application gt Filtering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Action Select Discard source to drop frames from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block
320. onfiguring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing subnet based VLAN Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 8 Protocol Based VLANs Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an upstream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol BS Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable
321. only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN For example ports 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and ports 4 5 6 7 belong to static VLAN 120 You can configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You can also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7 All upstream ARP traffic from port 1 2 and 3 will be grouped together and all upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C Figure 38 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 8 9 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN Click Protocol Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 39 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Frotocol Based VLA Active O Port amea o IP v C Others Hex VID los Priority Name Ethernet type Vlan Port Setting Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPT
322. or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers and the Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Rate pps Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets 1 2048 that the Switch receives from each port each second The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets Enter O to disable this limit which is recommended for trusted ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snoopin
323. ork with only one virtual router VR1 VRID 1 and two switches The network is connected to the WAN via an uplink gateway G 172 21 1 100 The host computer X is set to use VR1 as the default gateway Figure 157 VRRP Configuration Example One Virtual Router Network 192 168 1 1 172 21 1 1 Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 192 168 1 20 272 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 33 VRRP You want to set switch A as the master router Configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration screens on the switches as shown in the figures below Figure 158 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch A Active Virtual Router ID Iv Name Example Network 192 168 1 1 24 v sl Advertisement Interval NN Preempt Mode Iv Priority uo Uplink Gateway 2211300 Primary Virtual IP fiszi68120 Secondary Virtual IP pon Figure 159 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B Active Iv m EE Network 192 168 10 1 24 virtual Router ID fi Advertisement Interval n Preempt Mode Vv Priority hoo Uplink Gateway fiz2211 100 Primary Virtual IP 321688120 Secondary Virtual IP booo After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration the VRRP Status screens for both switches are shown next Figure 160 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch A OR Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master
324. ot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 43 2 1 This trap is sent when the MRSTP root switch changes MSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 107 7 This trap is sent when the MSTP root 0 1 switch changes STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 43 2 2 This trap is sent when the MRSTP topology changes MSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 107 7 This trap is sent when the MSTP root 0 2 switch changes mactable MacTableFullEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when more than 99 of the MAC table is used MacTableFullEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 This trap is sent when less than 95 of the MAC table is used rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 16 0 1 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 16 0 2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON falling threshold 35 3 4 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen go back to the Access Control screen You can click Access Control to XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Figure 175 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP is am P Access Control Trap Group General Setting Version v2c m Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public Trap Destination Version Port Username
325. ou are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 37 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 37 Syslog Figure 189 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup e OS SCE Syslog Setup Active O Server Address 0 0 0 0 Log Level Level 0 Add Cancel Clear Index Active IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 128 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this Syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin
326. ou can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN 22 6 3 How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case an
327. our computer 3 3 LEDs The following table describes the LEDs Table 3 LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION BPS Green Blinking The system is receiving power from the backup power supply On The backup power supply is connected and active Off The backup power supply is not ready or not active PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table 3 LEDs continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally S1 Green On The Switch is connected to other switches in the stack on Stacking Port 1 Off The Switch is not connected to other switches in the stack on Stacking Port 1 S2 Green On The Switch is connected to other switches in the stack on Stacking Port 2 Off The Switch is not connected to other switches in the stack on Stacking Port 2 System Status Displays The Switch is starting up hourglass icon Displays The LED is showing the Stack ID number of the Switch Stack ID number 1000Base T Gigabit Ports W 1 24 Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 1000 Mbps Ether
328. outer ID 192 168 1 10 Network Type BROADCAST Cost 15 IB Transmit Delay is 1 sec State Backup Priority 1 x J a Neighbor Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface 192 168 1 1 l Full DR 00 00 34 192 168 1 1 swif2 192 168 4 3 Link State Database OSPF Router with ID 192 168 1 10 Router Link States Area 0 0 0 0 Link ID DV Router Age Seq CkSum Link count P Poll Interval s jao Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 IP Application gt OSPF Status LABEL DESCRIPTION OSPF This field displays whether OSPF is activated Running or not Down Interface The text box displays the OSPF status of the interface s on the Switch Neighbor The text box displays the status of the neighboring router participating in the OSPF network Link State The text box displays information in the link state database which contains data in the Database LSAs Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to end OSPF status polling The following table describes some common output fields Table 88 OSPF Status Common Output Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION Interface Internet Address This field displays the IP address and subnet bits of an IP routing do
329. own next XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control Figure 58 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control E E Bandwidth Control Active z un Active Commit Rate i Peak Rate diri ioi pui r pem Kbps O Kbps m Kbps 1 0 I Kbps C 1 Kbps n E Kbps 2 r i Kbps m 1 Kbps r fi Kbps 3 O 1 Kbps 5 1 Kbps n Kbps 4 C f Kbps m 1 Kbps r f Kbps 5 r I Kbps 1 Kbps r E Kbps 6 n 1 Kbps 1 Kbps n I Kbps 7 rj f Kbps n 1 Kbps r 1 Kbps ag c QE cem The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 33 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Commit Rate Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Active Select this check box to activa
330. p to four managers to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Table 120 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in Management Access Control Logins screen User Information Use this section to configure users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this section to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication from this user Choose noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the
331. ports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s e System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting is disabled Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the console port telnet or SSH Dot1x Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the Switch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select e start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session Stop only to have the Swi
332. pplication gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation Aggregation Setting Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click in the Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 15 2 on page 133 for more information on dynamic link aggregation XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol J Link Aggregation Setting Active O System Priority 65535 Group ID LACP Active Ti E T2 O T3 O T4 E T5 C T5 E Port LACP Timeout 2 30 seconds 1 30 F seconds 2 30 7 seconds 3
333. prune message P 3 Ifhosts later join the multicast group a graft message G to undo the prune is sent to the parent 4 The final multicast M after pruning and grafting is shown in the next figure XGS 4528F User s Guide 247 Chapter 30 DVMRP Figure 132 How DVMRP Works Coc SC 30 2 1 DVMRP Terminology DVMRP probes are used to discover other DVMRP Neighbors on a network DVMRP reports are used to exchange DVMRP source routing information These packets are used to build the DVMRP multicast routing table that is used to build source trees and also perform Reverse Path Forwarding RPF checks on incoming multicast packets RPF checks prevent duplicate packets being filtered when loops exist in the network topology DVMRP prunes trim the multicast delivery tree s DVMRP grafts attach a branch back onto the multicast delivery tree 30 3 Configuring DVMRP Configure DVMRP on the Switch when you wish it to act as a multicast router mrouter Click IP Application gt DVMRP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 133 IP Application gt DVMRP eun Active O Threshold 255 Index Network VID Active 1 10 10 10 1 24 2 rH 2 192 168 1 1 24 1 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 30 DVMRP Table 95 IP Application gt DVMRP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select Active to enable DVMRP
334. r only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 24 1 2 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high 24 1 2 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 37 on page 305 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 24 1 2 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch 1 Configure DHCP snooping See Section 24 1 1 4 on page 203 LES It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table 2 Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second XGS 4528F Us
335. rd a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 10 VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 2 Automatic VLAN Registration 8 2 1 GARP 8 2 1 1 GARP Timers 8 2 2 GVRP GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values GVRP GARP VLAN Reg
336. re done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 6 Subnet Based VLANs Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify When a frame is received on a port the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP subnet it came from The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same subnet based VLAN One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic from the same IP subnet For example an ISP Internet Service Provider may divide different types of services it provides to customers into different IP subnets Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 video for 192 168 1 0 24 and data for 10 1 1 0 24 The Switch can then be configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames You can then configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 voice services You can also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192 168 1 0 24 video services Lastly you can configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10 1 1 0 24 data services All untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly That is video services receive the highest
337. ress ENTER 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen XGS 4528F User s Guide 51 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 15 Web Configurator Login Enter Network Password 2 x J qe Please type your user name and password Site 192 168 0 1 Realm XGS 4528F at Thu Jan 1 21 28 11 1970 User Name Password Save this password in your password list omen 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 16 Web Configurator Home Screen Status amp Save Status B Logout B Help ED Port Status g ed Application Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors B 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 JP Application 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Management E Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Ps Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disab
338. rity certificate A The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority o The security certificate date is valid fy The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes No View Certificate XGS 4528F User s Guide 297 Chapter 35 Access Control 35 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to continue in Netscape Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the Switch s certificate into the SSL client Figure 182 Security Certificate 1 Netscape Website Certified by an Unknown Authority Unable to verify the idergity EXAMPEF trusted site A Possible reasons for this ere Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete dueJ6 isconfii i You are connected to a site pretendina coke Mok Ii bly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting th
339. rivacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections gt Java Sun Use Java 2 v1 4 1 07 for applet requires restart 3 Microsoft VM Ld a console enabled requires restart BPH enabled ompiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing of gt Restore Defaults Cancel Apply 44 3 Problems with the Password Table 140 Troubleshooting the Password PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Switch password using the proper casing Cannot access the The password field is case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 44 Troubleshooting XGS 4528F User s Guide Product Specifica
340. rmance The Switch supports the following MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP 35 3 3 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID that begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 is defined in private MIBs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID Table 115 SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmstart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the fan speed goes above or below the normal operating range FanSpeedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the fan speed returns to the normal operating range XGS 4528F User s Guide 287 Chapter 35 Access Control Table 115 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION temperature TemperatureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the temperature goes above or
341. ropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender Mac This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 24 7 on page 217 Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated dhcp deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID dhcp permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID
342. rotocol 109 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 107 Multiple STP 109 Multiple STP see MSTP 109 MVR 179 configuration 181 group configuration 183 network example 179 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 179 N NAT 352 network management system NMS 286 NTP RFC 1305 76 O OSPF 231 advantages 231 area 231 237 Area 0 231 area ID 237 authentication 237 autonomous system 231 backbone 231 configuration steps 233 general settings 235 how it works 232 interface 232 234 238 link state database 232 234 network example 232 priority 232 redistribute route 236 route cost 238 router elections 232 router ID 236 router types 231 status 233 stub area 231 238 virtual link 232 virtual links 240 vs RIP 231 OSPF Open Shortest Path First 231 P password 58 administrator 294 problems 333 PHB Per Hop Behavior 251 ping test connection 303 policy 159 160 and classifier 159 and DiffServ 157 configuration 159 example 160 overview 157 rules 157 158 viewing 160 policy configuration 160 pop up Windows allowing 328 port authentication 141 and RADIUS 188 IEEE802 1x 143 144 190 192 MAC authentication 142 port based IGMP 245 port based VLAN type 78 port cloning 323 324 advanced settings 323 324 basic settings 323 324 port details 68 port isolation 93 102 port mirroring 131 132 339 XGS 4528F User s Guide 367 Index direction 132 egress 132 ingress 132 port redundancy 133
343. roup See Section 8 1 on page 87 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 33 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail VLAN Detail g VLAN Status Port Number VID 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 Elapsed Time Status 1 d 5 7 g TUE d3 415 Pea 15197 2 23 125 Dr U Uu U U Uu U u U U Uu U U u 1 3 22 07 Static Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu U U Uu Uu Uu XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR 8 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch See Sectio
344. rt Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting XGS 4528F User s Guide PART III Advanced Setup VLAN 87 Static MAC Forward Setup 103 Filtering 105 Spanning Tree Protocol 107 Bandwidth Control 127 Broadcast Storm Control 129 Mirroring 131 Link Aggregation 133 Port Authentication 141 Port Security 147 Classifier 151 Policy Rule 157 Queuing Method 163 VLAN Stacking 167 Multicast 173 Authentication amp Accounting 187 IP Source Guard 201 Loop Guard 221 VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be cr
345. rt that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 22 8 MVR Group Configuration All source por
346. rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 24 on page 108 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide E Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protoc
347. rvers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting
348. s State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 3 on page 108 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second Rx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Type a port number select Port and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports 6 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Figure 24 Status Port Details PortDetails Port Status Port Info Port
349. s 1 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master Alive Poll Intervals 10 Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 106 IP Application gt VRRP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of a rule Network This field displays the IP address and the subnet mask bits of an IP routing domain that is associated to a virtual router VRID This field displays the ID number of the virtual router VR Status This field displays the status of the virtual router This field is Master indicating that this Switch functions as the master router This field is Backup indicating that this Switch functions as a backup router This field displays Init when this Switch is initiating the VRRP protocol or when the Uplink Status field displays Dead Uplink Status This field displays the status of the link between this Switch and the uplink gateway This field is Alive indicating that the link between this Switch and the uplink gateway is up Otherwise this field is Dead This field displays Probe when this Switch is check for the link state Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling 33 3 VRRP Configuration The following sections describe the different parts of the VRRP Co
350. s are shown in this User s Guide lt gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device BS Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The XGS 4528F may be referred to as the Switch the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on XGS 4528F User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Switch icon is not a
351. s from appearing C Block pop up 3 Click Apply to save this setting 44 2 1 1 2 Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 44 Troubleshooting Figure 204 Internet Options Internet Options n General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings e Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet m zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable CJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker S Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups Settings 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 1 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 205 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site
352. s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide PART VI Troubleshooting amp Product Specifications leshooting 327 ecifications 335 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies 44 1 Problems Starting Up the Switch Table 138 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION None of the LEDs Check the power connection and make sure the power source is turned on turn on when you turn on the y If the error persists you may have a hardware problem In this case you should Switch contact your vendor 44 2 Problems Accessing the Switch Table 139 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot Make sure the ports are properly connected access the You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close Switch using other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Telnet Check that you have enabled Telnet service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details cannot The administrator username is admin
353. s the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority LANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the Switch Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your Switch that 1s easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Switch will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Switch unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your
354. sage generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have the same revision number to belong to the same region
355. save the configuration changes to the current configuration BES Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 34 Maintenance 34 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 169 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer xj 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system di Cancel 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch 34 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device D gt Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Figure 170 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade
356. se changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 5 1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping BES The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 104 DHCP Snooping Port Configure DHCP Snooping Port Configure Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps Untrusted v 1 Untrusted v 2 Untrusted Y 3 Untrusted v 4 Untrusted v ll Untrusted tt A 6 Untrusted v 7 Untrusted 8 Untrusted el e EL boc x d Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 DHCP Snooping Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted
357. sed on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels See Section 44 7 on page 336 for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEL s vendor ID is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting BES Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Table 65 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 65 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Egress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Assignment Vendor ID 890 Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from O to 14 Note If you s
358. server Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP TFTP tool to put it on the Switch Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the Switch s configuration and put it back on the Switch later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 45 Product Specifications Table 143 Switching Specifications Layer 2 Features Bridging 8K MAC addresses Static MAC address filtering by source destination Broadcast storm control Static MAC address forwarding Switching Switching fabric 144Gbps non blocking Max Frame size 9 kbytes Forwarding frame IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet Il PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets STP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree capability 4 configurable trees IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol QoS IEEE 802 1p Eight priority queues per port Port based egress traffic shaping Rule based traffic mirroring Supports IGMP snoop
359. server 188 XGS 4528F User s Guide Index F fan speed 74 FCC interference statement 353 feature summary 54 file transfer using FTP command example 283 filename convention configuration configuration file names 283 filtering 105 rules 105 filtering database MAC table 315 firmware 74 upgrade 281 312 flow control 83 back pressure 83 IEEE802 3x 83 forwarding delay 122 frames tagged 93 untagged 93 front panel 43 FTP 38 283 file transfer procedure 283 restrictions over WAN 284 G GARP 88 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 88 GARP terminology 88 GARP timer 78 88 general features 339 general setup 75 getting help 60 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 76 GVRP 88 93 and port assignment 93 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 88 H hardware installation 39 mounting 40 hardware monitor 74 hardware overview 43 hello time 122 hops 122 HTTPS 296 certificates 296 implementation 296 public keys private keys 296 HTTPS example 297 humidity 335 IANA 352 IEEE 802 1p priority 79 IEEE 802 1x activate 143 144 190 192 reauthentication 144 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 141 IGMP 247 how it works 244 overview 243 port based 245 setup 245 version 173 version 3 245 versions supported 244 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 173 244 IGMP filtering 173 profile 178 profiles 175 IGMP snooping 173 MVR 179 ingress port 102 Installation Rack mounting 40 instal
360. sical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router VLAN Stacking Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers MAC Address Filter Filter traffic based on the source and or destination MAC address and VLAN group ID DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the Switch assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network IGMP Snooping The Switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the Switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow
361. sseeen 284 Table 113 Access Control COVervie W cd pip p CHE Eo anaE on EM NN PERRA Du M NERIS 285 Table TH SNMP EIAs 22ssuecch esc tex Yes t I Sa su FEBRE HAM LEE EP a e EXER EA EX E a ERE RU ean 286 Table 119 SNMP System TapE quias coe css e PAR ded ea eda asari Pannan ESKEAN sonnei EEDAN ERE ERA eerta EAA SERKAN arg Ead 287 I xusTlszau i i eem 288 CUL RWEE NICO CIPUE 289 Table 119 SNMP IP WARS nerca en nk REEL RRER HEN DR MEER PER PRAREKEH E X MEER REPCREE REPE UM EP Po Rb PEE QD Pe de RE ER EEUS 289 E xu cpehlUzEe or IMICIO t 290 Table 120 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP sssssssssssesseeenee nennen en nnne 291 Table 121 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group sssssssees 293 Table 122 Management gt Access Control gt Logins 1e bet bred d epe e shi d dd eid 294 Table 123 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control sss 300 Table 124 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management sss 300 XGS 4528F User s Guide 21 List of Tables Table 125 Management DIGODDSG scisssccsesinsascxsdernsniczyesinonasseernensnsserangnsnsseriouanderetinonesersiiuannasesiinats 303 Table 126 Syslog Severity Levels rans ac cen paarteae cvamaleen bianca das ceemeleundawpaadeeieeesnana Dats ptadenceniniteas icuenese dene 305 Table 127 Management gt Syslog uussesceeiendeteerieddock
362. sses do not age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP MSTP to Protocol prevent network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed Control from specified source s to specified destination s Broadcast Storm This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Control Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port Authentication authentication as well as MAC authentication for clients communicating via the Switch Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to group packets based on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets Queuing Method This link takes you to a scre
363. st Slow 28 1 1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and Areas An OSPF autonomous system AS can be divided into logical areas Each area represents a group of adjacent networks All areas are connected to a backbone also known as area 0 The backbone is the transit area to route packets between two areas A stub area at the edge of an AS is not a transit area since there is only one connection to the stub area The following table describes the four classes of OSPF routers Table 86 OSPF Router Types TYPE DESCRIPTION Internal Router IR An Internal or intra area router is a router in an area ABR Area Border Router An Area Border Router connects two or more areas Backbone Router BR A backbone router has an interface to the backbone AS Boundary Router other ASs An AS boundary router exchanges routing information with routers in XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF The following figure depicts an OSPF network example The backbone is area 0 with a backbone router The internal routers are in area 1 and 2 The area border routers connect area 1 and 2 to the backbone Figure 119 OSPF Network Example 28 1 2 How OSPF Works Layer 3 devices exchange routing information to build a synchronized link state database within the same AS or area The link state database contains records of router IDs their associated links and path costs Each device can then use the link
364. st priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result T
365. t switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general
366. t you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 36 Diagnostic XGS 4528F User s Guide Syslog This chapter explains the syslog screens 37 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 126 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message siol oO BR Ww N
367. take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning See iB AE FE allem TERHEBUIRSEDERINS ARERR Sila T ABS eA SH STR Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating XGS 4528F User s Guide Appendix B Legal Informa
368. tance Instance VLAN 0 1 4093 msti i 7 Bridge Regional Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8001 000000000000 Internal Cost 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to
369. tch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for recording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 64 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions ba
370. te peak rate limits on this port Peak Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 13 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next
371. ter ID 236 routing domain 79 268 routing protocols 236 339 routing table 321 RSTP 107 rubber feet 39 S safety warnings 6 save configuration 58 280 screen summary 54 Secure Shell See SSH security 339 service access control 299 service port 300 XGS 4528F User s Guide Index Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SNMP 38 286 agent 286 and MIB 286 authentication 292 communities 291 management model 286 manager 286 MIB 287 network components 286 object variables 286 protocol operations 286 security 292 setup 290 traps 292 version 3 and security 287 versions supported 286 SNMP traps 287 supported 287 288 289 290 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 107 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 164 SSH encryption methods 296 how it works 295 implementation 296 SSH Secure Shell 295 SSL Secure Socket Layer 296 standby ports 133 start up problems 327 static bindings 201 static MAC address 103 static MAC forwarding 95 97 103 static routes 227 228 static trunking example 138 Static VLAN 91 static VLAN control 92 tagging 92 status 52 67 LED 47 link aggregation 134 OSPF 233 port 67 port details 68 power 75 STP 116 119 123 VLAN 90 VRRP 268 STP 107 339 bridge ID 116 119 bridge priority 115 118 configuration 114 117 120 designated bridge 108 forwarding delay 115 118 Hello BPDU 108 Hello Time 115 116 118 119 how it works 108 Max Age 115 116 118 119 path cost 108 115 118 port
372. the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 99 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE 802 1p O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 31 4 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 143 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting oj0 v OPES aD Diffserv DSCP to 802 1p Mapping 1 0 gt foz foz a o 5 0 gt e 0 7 o gt e 1 gt te 2 gt 24 3 gt afar 40 5 v asje v se v enm oha afte o t2ft aha aha o sz 17 2 18 2 v 1912 v 20 2 v 21 2 22 2 23 2 2s 3 26 3 v 27 3 v 28 3 29 3 v 30 3 31 3 m 33 4 gt 34 4 v 35 4 v 36 4 v 37 4 v 38 4 v 38 4 v ai 5 gt 42 5 v 43 5 v 44 5 v 45 5 v 46 5 v 47 5 v aafe gt 50 6 v 51 6 v 52 6 v 53 5 v 54 6 v 55 6 v 57 gt 58 v 59 v 60 v B1 v 52 53 Apply Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classific
373. the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XGS 4528F User s Guide Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 25 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network Figure 112 Loop Guard vs STP Loop Guard mmm mmm mu Rm um I NN S p n m p m p m m D
374. this to create static bindings in the binding table DHCP snooping Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets typical implementation you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection 24 1 1 DHCP Snooping Overview Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers 24 1 1 1 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches The Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high The Switch learns dynamic bindings from trusted ports The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the
375. thout notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations XGS 4528F User s Guide 353 Appendix B Legal Information FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to
376. tion condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information
377. tion This is the default setting Select Simple to use a simple password to authenticate VRRP packet exchanges on this interface XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 33 VRRP Table 107 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt IP Interface continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password key up to eight printable ASCII character long in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table 33 3 2 VRRP Parameters This section describes the VRRP parameters 33 3 2 1 Advertisement Interval The master router sends out Hello messages to let the other backup routers know that it is still up and running The time interval between sending the Hello messages is the advertisement interval By default a Hello message is sent out every second If the backup routers do not receive a Hello message from the master router after this interval expires it is assumed that the master router is down Then the backup router with the highest priority becomes the master router LES All routers participating in the virtual router must use the same advertisement interval
378. tions The following tables summarize the Switch s hardware and firmware features Table 141 Hardware Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Dimensions Standard 19 rack mountable 438 mm W x 310 mm D x 44 45 mm H Weight 4 9 Kg Power Specification AC 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 8 A max 85 W internal universal power supply DC 36 VDC 72 VDC 2 3 A max 80 W consumption There is no tolerance for the DC input voltage One Backup Power Supply BPS connector Interfaces 24 Gigabit Ethernet GbE Dual Personality interfaces Each interface has a 1000Base T port compatible with Cat5 5e 6 copper cable a mini GBIC slot compatible with Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP Multi Source Agreement MSA transceivers to be used with 1000Base X fiber cables For each Dual Personality interface one port or slot is active at a time Two stacking ports One optional uplink module set One local management Ethernet 10 100Base T port One RS 232 console port Ethernet Ports Auto negotiating 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode 1000 Mbps and 10 Gbps in full duplex Auto crossover Use either crossover or straight through Ethernet cables Auto MDIX Compliant with IEEE 802 3ad u x Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x LEDs Main switch BPS PWR SYS ALM Per Stacking port S1 S2 Per mini GBIC port green LED Per 100
379. tive Iv Name Example Packet Format All X G Any Any Layer 3 Source Destination Priority Cc 0 AI Ethernet Type C others Hex IP Address Address Prefix VLAN c 1 Layer 2 G Any MAC Address Sourcg C Any Ol G Any Destination MAC Address DSCP SW L C 1 Al Establish only IP Protocol C others Dec IP Address Address Prefix G Any Socket Number C foo 0 0 i G Any k Socket Number Cc C c macho f0 be ed e Br omel 1 0 k IC khD IEC pooo f Add Cancel Cleer EXAMPLE XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy to define action s on the classified traffic flow See Chapter 19 on page 157 for information on configuring a policy tule XGS 4528F User s Guide Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules 19 1 Policy Rules Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 18 on page 151 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 19 1 1 DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are
380. to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number for an interface Network This field displays the IP interface information Area ID This field displays the area ID in an IP address format with dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Authentication This field displays the authentication method used Same as Area None Simple or MD5 Key ID When the Authentication field displays MD5 this field displays the identification number of the key used Cost This field displays the interface cost used for calculating the routing table Priority This field displays the priority for this OSPF interface Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 28 6 OSPF Virtual Links Configure and view virtual link settings in this screen See Section 28 1 on page 231 for more information on OSPF In the OSPF Configuration screen click Virtual Link to display the screen as shown next Figure 126 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Virtual Link Name Area ID Peer Router ID Authentication Index Name c ORE NND Configuration name No Configured Aree td booo CS None sj kyo Ro Key a Add Cancel Clear Peer Router ID Delete Cancel Authentication Key I
381. to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add IP domains 7 6 1 IP Interfaces The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 On the Switch as a layer 3 device an IP address is not
382. to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 35 3 6 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 BS It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to view the screen as shown Figure 177 Management gt Access Control gt Logins Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm ED Logins d Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Access Control m pitesti Edit Logins Login User Name ee E G 2d d AMEN NENENMNMNMMMMZNM Password Retype to confirm p E m Apply
383. to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there 1s a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch These rubber feet help protect the Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 5 Attaching Rubber Feet BES Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection BS For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four MS flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver gt Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 2 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the r
384. to the 1000Base T port or the mini GBIC port The mini GBIC ports have priority over the 1000Base T ports This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding 1000Base T port are connected at the same time the 1000Base T port will be disabled XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 2 1000Base T Ports The Switch has 24 1000Base T auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 100 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet the speed can be 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps The duplex mode can be both half or full duplex at 100 Mbps and full duplex only at 1000 Mbps An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 100 1000 Mbps and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the Switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control Off 3 1 3 Mini GBIC Slots gt These are 24 slots for Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver Use a transceiver to connect a fiber optic cable to the Switch The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 8
385. tomatic VLAN registration 88 Autonomous System and OSPF 231 Autonomous System AS 231 247 B back up configuration file 282 Backbone Router BR 231 backbone routing 231 Backup Designated Router BDR and OSPF 232 bandwidth control 339 basic settings 73 BDR Backup Designated Router 232 binding 201 binding table 201 building 201 BPDUS Bridge Protocol Data Units 108 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 108 bridging 339 browser configuration 328 C certifications 353 notices 354 viewing 354 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 87 changing the password 58 CIST 112 CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree 110 Class of Service CoS 251 classifier 151 153 and QoS 151 editing 154 example 155 overview 151 setup 151 153 154 viewing 154 cloning a port See port cloning cluster management 309 and switch passwords 314 XGS 4528F User s Guide Index cluster manager 309 313 cluster member 309 314 cluster member firmware upgrade 312 network example 309 setup 312 specification 309 status 310 switch models 309 VID 313 web configurator 311 cluster manager 309 cluster member 309 command interface 38 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST 110 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 112 configuration 228 change running config 281 configuration file 59 backup 282 restore 59 282 saving 280 configuration saving 58 console port settings 47 contact information 357 copyin
386. traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purposes only MAC This field displays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification Address number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column XGS 4528F User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol M
387. ts Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purposes only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is the immediate Address neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4528F User s Guide RIP This chapter shows you how to configure RIP Routing Information Protocol 27 1 RIP Overview RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information with other routers The Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to Both the Switch will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives Incoming the Switch will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received Outgoing the Switch will send out RI
388. ts and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration Multicast VLAN ID OETA TON NN E MYR Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel j The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from the drop VLAN ID down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 173 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Ad
389. ts the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the following fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive
390. ttings If you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same port the Switch performs IEEE 802 1x authentication first If a user fails to authenticate via the IEEE 802 1x method then access to the port is denied IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password When the client provides the login credentials the Switch sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Figure 66 IEEE 802 1x Authentication Process E T ill New Connection Login Info Request Login Credentials 4 Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 16 1 2 MAC Authentication MAC authentication works in a very similar way to IEEE 802 1x authentication The main difference is that the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials The login credentials are based on the source MAC address of the client
391. tton type The information is then displayed in the summary table below IP Click this button to display and arrange the data according to IP address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This field displays the index number IP Address This is the IP address of the device from which the incoming packets came VID This is the VLAN group to which the packet belongs Port This is the port from which the above IP address was learned This field displays CPU to indicate the IP address belongs to the Switch Type This shows whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static belonging to the Switch XGS 4528F User s Guide ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 41 1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 41 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address it
392. ty and accounting settings Click Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 94 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct OEUSSUDRSDEGDNEUDEUGTITLUDD EENN G RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here Auth and Acct Setup Click Here 23 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 23 1 2 on page 188 for more information on RADIUS servers Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 95 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup D RADIUS Server Setup J Auth and Acct Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1812 O 2 0 0 0 0 1612 O Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1813 C 2 0 0 0 0 1813 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings Server Mode This field only applies if you configure multiple RADIUS se
393. type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops 15 2 1 Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 36 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 37 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 15 3 Link Aggregation Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Status screen displays by default See Section 15 1 on page 133 for more information Figure 61 Advanced Application Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Setting Index Enabled Ports Synchronized Ports Aggregator ID Status 1 2 3 x S p 4 5 6 E The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled Port These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggr
394. u aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 15 6 on page 138 for a static port trunking example 15 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The Switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups When you enable LACP Iink aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that XGS 4528F User s Guide E Chapter 15 Link Aggregation You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media
395. ucted Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology 11 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 25 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 25 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 11 1 4 Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEU s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch
396. ued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS accounting server is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS acco
397. uide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection XGS 4528F User s Guide Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel Connections The figure below shows the front panel of the Switch Figure 8 Front Panel DAA e D e e Sra rte re mere EAE a e e Ren Weds era e ME EN te E ERE md RR mM oO ws n m LI LI a AN W A Y Y Y Y Y Y A Y A Y Y Te Y TAT Y Y Y A ME 1 323 byi byt Lg Lr Lg rad L M Tu by tpa Eya T5 Lya M Ly Lg Lyt Lg Lg Lg ty The following table describes the ports Table 1 Panel Connections CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION 24 Dual Each interface has one 1000Base T copper RJ 45 port and one mini GBIC Gigabit Personality Interface Converter fiber port with one port active at a time Interfaces 24 1000Base T Ports Connect these ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches using Category 5 5e 6 1000Base T Ethernet cables 24MIini GBIC Ports Use Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP transceivers in these ports for 1000Base X fiber optic connections to backbone Ethernet switches 3 1 1 Dual Personality Interfaces There are 24 Dual Personality interfaces comprising 24 1000Base T mini GBIC combo ports For each interface you can connect either
398. unting 23 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Station Id attribute Table 67 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS IP Address v v v Service Type v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session ld v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Terminate Cause v Table 68 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS IP Address v v v Service Type v v v Calling Station Id v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session ld v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Terminate Cause v 23 3 2 3 Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 69 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS IP Address v v v NAS Port v v v Class v v v Called Station Id v v v XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting
399. unting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 2 3 Authentication and Accounting Setup Use this screen to configure authentication and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the Auth and Acct Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 97 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup Authentication Type Login Accounting Update Period Type System Exec Dot1x Commands ORES ee Privilege Enable o minutes Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege ri o radius gt O 0 start stop radius j m stertstop radius O O stop only tacacs fo Auth and Acct Method 1 local local Method 2 Method 3 Apply Cancel
400. up power supply A An optional uplink module B Two stacking ports C An RJ 45 out of band management port D An RS 232 management console port E A connector for the power receptacle F A power switch G DC power input model only Figure 13 Rear Panel AC Model D e oo PU zm jo pue 1 mm oO GMT B C D E Figure 14 Rear Panel DC Model e D o spe fo D mm E 2 9 9 G F The following table describes the ports on the rear panel Table 2 Panel Connections CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION Optional two These ports are part of the optional uplink module which you can use to connect your 10 GbE Ports switch to other high speed Ethernet switches in your network Use 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable XFP transceivers to connect 1000Base X fiber optic cables to these ports See Section 3 1 3 1 on page 44 and Section 3 1 3 2 on page 45 for information on installing and removing transceivers See the EM 422 User s Guide for more information on this module Two stacking ports Connect these ports to other XGS 4528F switches for stacking using stacking cables Management Connect to a computer using an RJ 45 Ethernet cable for local configuration of the Port Switch Console Port Only connect this port to your computer using an RS 232 cable if you want to configure the Switch using the comman
401. updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping database for any reason Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP snooping database Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the DHCP snooping database XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 72 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed writes This field d
402. uplink port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 86 MVR Multicast Television Example n 22 7 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR link to display the screen as shown next You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR QO D gt Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active O Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority o Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging None E OHOO a 9 0 9 0 0 0 90 0 9 5 0 0 0 0 0O HuHu HuHu HEHEHE Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the r
403. ure 48 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection Region 1 Region 2 11 1 5 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANS that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 49 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 3 Region 2 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown 112 XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 50 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 d00000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP
404. use it is already assigned to the Switch itself Hostname This field displays the system name of the client 32 4 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients 32 4 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent Information This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch rela
405. ut VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4528F User s Guide Filtering This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 10 1 Configure a Filtering Rule C
406. vent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS server Clear RADIUSNotReachableEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS server can be reached accounting entOn RADIUSAcctNotReachableEv 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS accounting server entClear RADIUSAcctNotReachableEv 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS accounting server can be reached Table 118 SNMP IP Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Table 119 SNMP Switch Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MRSTPNewRo
407. want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 22 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Filtering Profile Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Add Clear Profile Name Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule Default n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Delete Cancel XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes T
408. web browser See Chapter 4 on page 51 Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the Web Configurator and may be necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 34 8 on page 283 SNMP The device can be monitored and or managed by an SNMP manager See Section 35 3 on page 286 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch You could simply restore your last configuration XGS 4528F User s Guide Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch 2 1 Freestanding Installation 1 Make sure the Switch is clean and dry 2 Setthe Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough
409. witch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the Switch System Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch 34 2 Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults 2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 168 Load Factory Default Start Microsoft Internet Explorer j x 32 Are you sure you want to load Factory default 3 Inthe web configurator click the Save button to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 34 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to
410. xadecimal character pairs Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destination MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Protocol Refer to Table 47 on page 155 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the Switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Address Prefix E Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Destination IP Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Specify
411. y Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1 priority to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Select Replace the IP TOS with the 802 1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule Table 48 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Out of profile Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic action Select Drop the packet to
412. y default Select this option to enable it Router ID Router ID uniquely identifies the Switch in an OSPF Enter a unique ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation for the Switch Redistribute Route redistribution allows your Switch to import and translate external routes learned Route through other routing protocols RIP and Static into the OSPF network transparently Active Select this option to activate route redistribution for routes learned through the selected protocol Type Select 1 for routing protocols such as RIP whose external metrics are directly comparable to the internal OSPF cost When selecting a path the internal OSPF cost is added to the AB boundary router to the external metrics Select 2 for routing protocols whose external metrics are not comparable to the OSPF cost In this case the external cost of the AB boundary router is used in path decision to a destination Metric Value Enter a route cost between 0 and 16777214 The default metric value is 15 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4528F User s Guide Chapter 28 OSPF 28 4 Configure OSPF Areas To ensure that the Switch rece
413. your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 111 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config cfg This is the configuration config filename on the Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Switch 34 8 1 1 Example FTP Commands gt ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp gt get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 34 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open fol
414. ys to a DHCP server Relay Agent Information can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 103 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always 0 for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to 64 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings gt General Setup 32 4 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 146 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global DHCP Relay Status Active E Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information mM Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 104 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 3 Rel

ZyXEL XGS-4528F User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents